Table of Contents. Special Application Brakes MARINE/MARITIME/NAVY APPLICATIONS...50 MINING BRAKES - MSHA CERTIFIED...51 ENCODER BRAKES...

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "Table of Contents. Special Application Brakes MARINE/MARITIME/NAVY APPLICATIONS...50 MINING BRAKES - MSHA CERTIFIED...51 ENCODER BRAKES..."

Transcription

1 Table of Contents Performance Parameters and Limited Warranty Solenoid Actuated Brakes (SAB) Introduction Selection Modifications-Descriptions and Prices Page CLOSE COUPLED NEMA Frame Series (lb-ft) Nm Enclosure 8C 8, IP C - TC 56, IP, 3, 5, 55, 56, TC - 56TC/UC 56, IP 3, 5, , IP 3, 5, TC/UC - 86TC/UC 87, IP 3, TC/TSC/UC/USC 8, IP 3, , IP 3, , - 5TC/TSC/UC/USC 86, , IP 3, TC/TSC/UC/USC 86,00 0 -, IP 3, DIVISION HAZARDOUS LOCATION Introduction C - TC 65, IP 3, 56 NEMA 7, TC - 56TC/UC 87, IP 3, 55 NEMA 7, TC/TSC/UC/USC 8, IP 56 NEMA 7, Foot Mounted 87, IP 3 NEMA 7, Foot Mounted 8, IP 3 NEMA 7, DIVISION HAZARDOUS LOCATION 56C - TC 56, IP TC - 56TC/UC 87, IP DOUBLE C-FE COUPLER BRAKES 56C - TC 56, IP 3, 5, 55, TC - 56TC/UC 87, IP 3, 5, FOOT MOUNTED WITH BEARING SUPPORTED THRU-SHAFT Foot Mounted 56, IP Foot Mounted 87, IP 3, Special Application Brakes MARINE/MARITIME/NAVY APPLICATIONS MINING BRAKES - MSHA CERTIFIED ENCODER BRAKES Armature Actuated Brakes (AAB) Introduction Selection Series Description (lb-in) Nm 30 High Holding Only-Servo Motor Brake 8-3 lb-in High Holding Only-Servo Motor Brake lb-in Commercial Duty-Small Gear Motors 3 - lb-in /3 Totally-Enclosed Non-Ventilated (TENV) Commercial Duty 3-7 lb-in NEMA C Totally-Enclosed Non-Ventilated (TENV) C-Face Mount.5-5 lb-ft & 333 European Style Metric Mounting lb-ft , 8 33 & 333 European Style-NEMA C-Face Mount lb-ft European Style Portal Crane Duty - Pressure Plate Mount lb-ft European Style Portal Crane Duty - Mag Body Mount lb-ft AAB Rectifiers Electric Brake Release Indicator (Proving Switch) AAB Modification - Descriptions and Pricing Technical Data Motor Frame Adapter Kits Foot Mounting Kits Dimensions for C-Face Motors/Mounting Tolerances Set and Release Times Conversions Formulas SINP - Electronic Centrifugal Switches Super-Mod Clutches and Brakes Application Engineering Worldwide Sales and Service Catalog 00 DATE 06/08 P/N Copyright 08 Rexnord Corporation. All rights reserved.

2 Performance Parameters and Limited Warranty The performance of Stearns brakes, clutches, clutch-brake combinations, solenoids, and controls depends upon the proper application of the product, adequate run in, installation and maintenance procedures, and reasonable care in operation. All torque values listed in our bulletins are nominal and are subject to the variations normally associated with friction devices. The purchaser should take into consideration all variables shown in the applicable specification sheets. Although our application engineers are available for consultation, final selection and performance assurance on the purchaser s machine is the responsibility of the purchaser. Careful purchaser selection, adequate testing at time of installation, operation and maintenance of all products of Rexnord Industries, LLC, Stearns Division are required to obtain effective performance. Stearns warrants to its purchasers that all its products will be free from defects in material and workmanship at the time of shipment to the purchaser for a period of one () year from the date of shipment. All warranty claims must be submitted in writing to Stearns within the warranty period, or shall be deemed waived. As to products or parts thereof which Stearns finds to have been defective at the time of shipment, its sole responsibility hereunder shall be to repair, correct or replace (whichever Stearns deems advisable) such defective products or parts without charge, FOB Stearns factory. In the alternative, Stearns may, at its option, either before or after attempting a different remedy, refund the purchase price upon return of the product or parts. This warranty shall not apply to any product which has been subjected to misuse: misapplication: neglect (including but not limited to improper maintenance and storage); accident: improper installation; modification (including but not limited to use of other than genuine Stearns replacement parts or attachments); adjustment; or repair. THE FOREGOING IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EPRESSED, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING THAT OF MERCHANTABILITY AND OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND OF ANY OTHER OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY ON OUR PART OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER. No Stearns representative has any authority to waive, alter, vary or add to the terms hereof without prior approval in writing, to our purchaser, signed by an officer of Rexnord Industries, LLC. Stearns liability for its products, whether for breach of contract, negligence, strict liability in tort, or otherwise, shall be limited to the repair, correction, or replacement of the products or parts thereof, or to the refund of the purchase price of such products or parts. Stearns will not be liable for any other injury, loss, damage or expense, whether direct or consequential, including but not limited to loss of use, income, profit or production, or increased cost of operation, or spoilage of or damage to material, arising in connection with the sale, installation, use of, inability to use, or the repair or replacement of, or late delivery of, Stearns products. Any cause of action for breach of the foregoing warranty must be brought within one () year from the date the alleged breach occurs. Note on Special (Nuclear) Applications: Rexnord Industries, LLC, Stearns Division products are designed for standard industrial and commercial applications. Operating requirements, environments and required tolerances in nuclear and aircraft applications may be beyond the commercial standards of the Stearns Divisions products. Rexnord Industries, LLC, Stearns Division will assume absolutely no responsibility for the use of and/or resale of Rexnord Industries, LLC, Stearns Division products for such applications unless approved in writing in advance by Rexnord Industries, LLC, Stearns Division.

3 Introduction to Solenoid Actuated Brakes (SAB s) Stearns Brakes Set the Standard for Excellence Stearns offers the most comprehensive line of solenoid actuated brakes (SAB s) on the market today. We have earned the reputation as the industry s quality leader by working closely with you, our customers, understanding your needs and developing products with design features to handle your most challenging applications. We have installed millions of Stearns brakes worldwide since 935. Many brakes operating today are 0 years old or more; evidence of our product quality and reliability. Stearns motor brakes can be mounted directly to an electric motor or foot mounted. The compact design delivers high torque in a small size with fast, positive response and no residual drag when released. Our brakes can be mounted directly onto NEMA C-face motors without special alignment procedures. Many motor manufacturers offer a brake kit which will convert a stock fan-cooled motor into a brakemotor. Stearns Solenoid Actuated Brakes feature unitized construction which makes servicing friction discs easy using only a screwdriver and wrench. The Stearns SAB ensures automatic stopping and holding any time power to the brake is interrupted. And, as with ALL Stearns products, the friction material is nonasbestos. We can produce a brake which meets your specifications, including metric mounting. Chances are, we ve already manufactured similar requirements from a long list of pre-engineered options. Enclosure Types Stearns brakes, when properly installed, are provided in a variety of IP enclosure types. IP - intended for general purpose, indoor applications, as a ventilated enclosure. Protected against dripping water. IP 3 - intended for indoor applications, as a non-ventilated enclosure. It provides protection against falling, non-corrosive dirt and liquid. Protected against spraying water. IP 5 - intended for dust protected indoor and outdoor applications. Protected against splashing water. IP 55 - intended for dust protected indoor and outdoor applications. Protected against water jets. IP 56 - intended for dust protected indoor and outdoor applications. Protected against heavy seas or powerful jets. IP 57 - intended for dust protected indoor and outdoor applications. Protected against the effects of immersion. NOTE: IP, 3 & 5 - formerly referred to by Stearns as NEMA, & respectively. IP 55, 56 & 57 - formerly referred to by Stearns as NEMA Type (BISSC Certified with epoxy coating and stainless steel hardware on exterior, or with a stainless steel enclosure). Self-Adjusting Disc Brakes Remote inaccessible locations or high cycling applications require a specially designed, lowmaintenance brake that will operate at peak efficiency and provide uniform braking for long periods of time. Stearns exclusive self-adjusting feature helps eliminate the major cause of brake maintenance - friction lining wear. Self-adjusting brakes are also well suited for applications where rapid cycling requires frequent resetting of solenoid air gap. Automatic adjustment also eliminates the errors that can occur with hand adjustment. They can be easily modified to suit your particular application. Depending upon the series you select, these brakes can be direct mounted on motors ranging in size from NEMA 8TC through NEMA 5C. Manually Adjusted Disc Brakes with Automatic Reset It s an unbeatable combination; the features you want most in spring-set disc brakes. Standard features now include: a unique spring design which allows for universal mounting, an air gap adjustment gauge for visual recognition that the brake needs adjustment, a new patented hub design, and genuine Stearns friction discs which are trademarked and patented. The 56 Series Brakes come in static torque ratings from.5 through 5 lb-ft with NEMA C-face mountings 56C, 3TC, TC, 8TFC and 8TFC. Ten different housing, endplate, and release configurations, with a wide variety of preengineered modifications, you can select from 0,000 possible combinations! In addition, for holding applications where friction disc wear is not a factor, Stearns 87,000 Series Brakes are available with an optional manual adjust. The 87,000 Series Brakes are available in static torque ratings from 6 lb-ft through 05 lb-ft, with NEMA C-face moutings, 8TC through 86TC. 3

4 Introduction to Stearns Solenoid Actuated Brakes (SAB s) Brakes for Hazardous Locations Although rugged Stearns Brakes are built to withstand rigorous industrial environments, many applications require additional protection from explosive gases or ignitable dusts. Stearns manufactures a complete line of disc brakes designed from the hazardous locations defined in the National Electric Code (NEC). Each brake is labeled to show the Class, Group, and maximum operating temperature of the brake enclosure. We offer both motor-mounted and footmounted designs, and all Stearns Hazardous Location Brakes are UL Listed and CUL or CSA certified. Double C-Face Disc Brake Couplers Stearns Disc Brake Couplers provide maximum versatility, allowing you to add a brake to a C-face motor with a single shaft extension. Using these reliable products, you can couple a C-face motor to a C-face gear reducer. Washdown Brakes Stearns Washdown Brakes include the 56,000 and 87,000 Series brake models. These brakes meet BISSC Standards, AAA Dairy Standards, and other food industry washdown requirements. They feature stainless steel hardware, neoprene gasketing, and FDAapproved white epoxy paint or stainless steel enclosure. Solenoid Actuated Brakes versus Armature Actuated Brakes Solenoid Actuated Brakes Armature Actuated Brakes Simple wear adjustment Complex wear adjustment Easy coil exchange for different voltages Maintained manual release with automatic reset for brake release during set-up Add on options easily assembled to standard unit Rapid set and release times. Connection can be made directly to power source Difficult to change out complete magnet assembly Non-maintained release (deadman) requires constant external force to operate Options require complete brake in most units Response time is slower due to required magnetic field build-up in magnet-style coil Direct connection to power source requires an optional electric control Marine Applications Brakes used in marine applications are customized to meet specific standards. These standards are established to provide various levels of corrosion resistance and performance standards under specific conditions. Maritime and Naval Brakes are designed for U.S. Navy and Coast Guard military specifications. These units conform to MIL-B-639C or 6CFR 0.0- and IEEE Standard 5. Special material components help prevent corrosion due to shipboard environments. SAB s used in marine environments can be custom built to meet the specifications. In addition, all Stearns SAB s are Type Approval Certified by the American Bureau of Shipping. Today, Stearns is focused on being your worldwide, value-added supplier. Our factory-trained field sales force is available to work with you in person to determine your application needs, as well as provide training and support to your engineers and maintenance staff. Our extensive network of more than 900 distributor branches is your assurance of quality service after the sale. Stearns is a division of Rexnord Industries, LLC, a world leader in power transmission products. We have the resources, experience and dedication to meet your industrial brake, clutch and solid-state electronic centrifugal switch needs. Trademarked and Patented Friction Discs Now you can rely on identifying genuine Stearns Friction Discs which assure continuous, reliable performance backed by the Stearns name. A molded ring in the Stearns friction discs makes it easy to visually identify a Stearns disc. The new splined discs are trademarked and patented by Stearns Division, Rexnord Industries, LLC.

5 Manually Adjusted Solenoid Actuated Brakes Stearns manually-adjusted disc brakes are available from.5 to 05 lb-ft static torque. They feature spring-set, electrically released designs having simple adjustments to compensate for friction lining wear. All have simple -wire motor connection. Series 8,00 Disc Brakes Mount directly to NEMA 8C motor frames. Static torque ratings are ½, 3 and 6 lb-ft. Quality Design Features: Spring-set, electrically released Single-disc caliper design Simple wear adjustment for easy maintenance Knock-out plug on housing for through-shaft applications Maintained manual release with automatic reset Mount in any position without modification All Series 56,00 Disc Brakes Mount directly to NEMA 56C, 3TC, TC, 8TC and 8TC motor frames. Static torque ratings from ½ to 5 lb-ft. The 56 Series family is an unbeatable combination: the features you want most in spring-set disc brakes, at a low price. We took a fresh look at the brake itself as well as your needs and designed a comprehensive line of spring-set brakes that set new standards for quality, reliability and customer convenience. Here s a sampling of the features we ve built into the Stearns 56 Series brakes: A Stearns-exclusive spring design permits all-position mount for unlimited mounting possibilities. Trademarked and patented friction discs Patented splined hub that increases friction disc working area, runs quieter, and offers enhanced heat dissipating capability ABS Type Approval Certified The 56 Series come in static torque ratings from.5 through 5 lb-ft with NEMA C-face mountings 56C, 3TC, TC, 8TFC, and 8TFC. Ten different housing, endplate, and release configurations accommodate IP 3, IP 5, IP 55, IP 56 and IP 57 enclosures. With a wide variety of pre-engineered modifications, you can select from 0,000 possible combinations! 87,000 Series Disc Brakes An optional manual adjust mechanism can be provided on 87,000 Series Brakes (does not include 87,300 and 87,800 Series Brakes). Mounted directly to NEMA 8TC through 56TC frames. Includes all the other features of the Series 87,000. Series 56,000 Design Features maintained manual release with automatic reset is standard on all series, in four variations four mounting holes are supplied on all series standard internal lead wire holes compatible with motor trademarked and patented friction discs NEMA C-face air gap adjustment gauge unique lever design develops a torque multiplication ratio of : between the solenoid and the friction surfaces unique all-position mount for unlimited mounting variations* single or dual voltage/frequency coils optional electronic switch eliminates arcing contacts while switching between the pull-in and holding coil windings in a solenoid coil *0 and 5 lb-ft brakes are easily adapted for vertical applications (kit included) 5

6 Exploded View- Part Indentification Series 56,000 Manually-Adjusted Solenoid Actuated Brake housing IP 3, 5 or 55 Self-Adjusting Disc Brakes - Main Components support plate assembly pressure plate stationary disc hub housing IP 3 or 5 endplate friction discs 6

7 Self-Adjusting Solenoid Actuated Brakes Stearns self-adjusting disc brakes feature an exclusive, automatic adjusting device that eliminates the major cause of brake maintenance adjustment to compensate for friction lining wear. This feature makes Stearns self-adjusting brakes ideal for remote or inaccessible locations, and for applications where rapid cycling requires frequent wear adjustment of manual adjustable brakes. The self-adjust mechanism is a simple wrap-spring clutch that automatically adjusts the brake s solenoid air gap to compensate for wear of the friction discs. Automatic adjustment occurs every time the brake is operated, eliminating the errors that can occur with hand adjustment. The self-adjust feature means Stearns motor brakes always operate at peak efficiency, providing more uniform braking, longer disc life, less maintenance time and smooth, quiet operation. There are nine series of Stearns self-adjusting brakes to select from: Series 8,000 brakes for direct mounting to NEMA 8TC through mounting to NEMA 3TC through 86TC motor frames. Static torque 365TC motor frames. Static ratings from 6 to 05 lb-ft. torque ratings from to 30 lb-ft. Series 8,000 brakes for direct mounting to NEMA 3TC through 05TSC motor frames. Static torque ratings from to 0 lb-ft. Series 86,00 brakes for direct mounting to NEMA TSC through 5TSC motor frames. Static torque ratings from 0 to,000 lb-ft. Series 87,00 brakes for direct Series 87,00 for floor mounted, double shaft output with bearing support. Static torque ratings from 0 to 05 lb-ft. Series 87,300 hazardous location brakes for UL Listed Division I applications, which mount directly to NEMA 8TC through 56TC motor frames. Static torque ratings from 0 to 05 lb-ft. Series 8,300 hazardous location brakes for UL listed Division I self-adjust mechanism applications, for mounting directly to NEMA 3TC through 05TSC. Static torque ratings to 330 lb-ft. Series 87,700 brakes for in-line applications, to couple the motor and gear box. For direct mounting to NEMA 8TC through 56TC motor frames. Rating of 0 to 05 lb-ft. Series 87,800 brakes hazardous location brake for UL Listed Division applications, which mount directly to NEMA 8TC through 56TC motor frames. Static torque ratings of 0 to 05 lb-ft. Lever Arm and Self-Adjusting Mechanism Quality Design Features Spring-set, electrically released. Self-adjusting mechanism minimizes maintenance by automatically compensating for lining wear. Unitized construction for easy friction disc replacement. Maintained manual release with automatic reset. Simple -wire motor connection. Standard or dust-tight, waterproof enclosures available. Many modifications for special application requirements. Models for marine and maritime applications. Models in accordance with Military Specification B639-C for Navy applications. ABS Type Approval Certified. 5 3 solenoid pull Solenoid is energized. Solenoid arm and pinion rotate. 3 Spring clutch tightens on hubs and turns pinion. Pinion moves rack section of lever arm back above pivot axis, overcoming force of pressure spring. 5 Buttons on lever arm move away from pressure plate, releasing brake. pivot axis of lever arm spring 7

8 SELECTION - Solenoid Actuated Brakes NOTE: For overhauling/high inertia loads, to stop in a specified time/distance, or for brakes combined with variable frequency drives, please refer to Application Engineering Section. Stearns Solenoid Actuated Brakes can be easily selected from Table and. Given motor data:. Horsepower (hp). Speed (RPM) 3. NEMA C-face frame size Determine:. Static torque rating of the brake (lb-ft). Brake series Step Given the motor horsepower and speed, select the brake torque from Table. in table is calculated using formula: T s = 5,5 x P x SF N Where, T s = Static torque, lb-ft P = Motor horsepower, hp N = Motor full load speed, rpm SF = Service Factor 5,5 = constant Example: Given a 5 hp, 800 RPM motor, the selected brake is 0 or 5 lb-ft. Step Given the NEMA C-face motor frame size, select the brake series from Table. Example: Given the 5 hp, 800 RPM motor in Step with a NEMA 8TC frame, Series 87,000; 87,300 or 87,700 Brakes can be selected to mount directly to the motor. Table Selection In this table, brake torque ratings are no less than 0% of the motor full load torque. Motor hp /6 / /3 / 3/ -/ / Brakemotor Shaft Speed (RPM) Static Rating of Brake (lb-ft) or * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *See catalog pages for maximum rpm by series. Thermal capacity must be considered in load stops over 800 rpm. Table Brake Series Selection by NEMA Frame Size Range (lb-ft) 8C 56C 3TC TC 8TC 8TC 3TC TC C-Face Motor Frame Size 5TC 5UC 56TC 56UC 8TC 8UC 86TC 86UC Manually-Adjusted Brakes (require periodic adjustment to compensate for friction disc wear).5-6 8, ,00 56,0 Self-Adjusting Brakes (automatically compensate for friction disc wear) ,00 87,00 8,000 8,000 86,000 86, TC 3UC 36TC 36UC 36TC 36UC 365TC 365UC Division I Hazardous Location Brakes (for atmospheres containing explosive gases or ignitable dusts) / Motor Mounted Brake Series 65,300 87,300 8,300 Division l Hazardous Location Brakes (for atmospheres containing explosive gases or ignitable dusts) / Foot Mounted 87,300 8,300 Division Hazardous Location Brakes 56,800 87,800 56,700 87, Double C-Face Brake Couplers (for direct coupling a C-face motor to a C-face gear reducer) 0TC 0UC 05TC 05UC TC UC 5TC 5UC UC SC 5C 5SC Brake mounts directly to motor C-face. Adapter required to mount brake to motor C-face. Refer to brake specifications for adapter information. 3 Brake endplate modified for direct mounting to motor C-face without an adapter. Brake is foot mounted for coupling to a hazardous-location motor. 8

9 Series 8,00 (-08-) Mounting Face: 8C 3.0 AK, 3.75 AJ Static :.5 through 6 lb-ft Enclosure: IP3 (formerly referred to by Stearns as NEMA ), Stamped Steel Housing Release Type: Side Lever Installation and Service Instructions: P/N Parts List: P/N Adjustable Manual Wear Adjustment Side Manual Release Lever with Automatic Reset Class B Coil Insulation Spring-Set Electrically Released Lead Wire Length: inches Maximum Speed: Horizontal 00 rpm Certified: CSA File LR-65. Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes request certified prints. Specifications Unit Data/Pricing Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm).5 () 3 () 6 (8) Number of Friction Discs Coil Size K M K Maximum Solenoid Cycle Rate cycles/min Maximum solenoid cycle rate is based on ambient temperature of 7 F ( C) with % duty cycle. Does not relate to brake cycle rate (see Thermal Capacity). Thermal capacity rating is based on ambient temperature of 7 F ( C), stop time of one second or less, with no heat absorbed from motor. Derate thermal capacity by 5% for vertical mounting. Refer to Selection Procedure Section Thermal Capacity hp-sec/min (watts) () () () Inertia (WK ) lb-ft (kgm x 0 - ).003 (.6).003 (.6).003 (.6) Model Number* Nominal Static (lb-ft) (Nm).5 ().5 () 3 () 3 () 6 (8) 6 (8) List Price ** $ Weight lbs (kg).6 (.).6 (.).6 (.).6 (.) 5 (.3) 5 (.3) Discount Symbol A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 *Eighth and Ninth positions designate lead wire position: 00 =internal and external 0 = internal only. **Subtract $0.00 for brake ordered less hub Ordering and Identification Information The following example and tables provide information for selecting the appropriate threeletter suffix when ordering a Stearns Brake. Example of a complete part number: BP Lead wire position does not apply Series Enclosure 00= Internal and external leadwire position 0= Internal only /30 Vac 5/8 bore and 3/6 x 3/3 keyway Current Ratings (amperes) Coil Size K M Current Inrush Holding Inrush Holding Inrush Holding Vac Voltage: 60 Hz 30 Vac Vac Modifications are availablesee SAB Modification Section 575 Vac Hub Selection Character A* B C* K Bore (in.) Keyway** (in. x in.) 5/8 /8 x /6 5/8 3/6 x 3/3 3/ 3/6 x 3/3 / /8 x /6 Maximum allowable bore.7. For through-shaft applications.65 is maximum *These bores are non-standard. Add $5.00 to list price. **Keyseats made to ANSI B7. Standard. Standard Voltage Ratings Character Voltage B D 0 E F 90 H 0 60 L 380 M N 575 O 0/0 P / /60 Q 90/380 R 00/00 Hz For Voltage add $ Includes electronic switch (polarized). 9

10 56 Series Mounting Face: NEMA 56C, 3TC and TC The 56,00 Series have the following design features: Spring-Set Electrically Released Static.5 through 5 lb-ft Adjustable, down to % of rated nameplate torque Manual Wear Adjustment Airgap Adjust Gage Splined Hub Product Overview Series Designed for industrial applications requiring high performance in a compact lightweight package. Construction: Die cast aluminum endplate with stamped steel housing Available Enclosures: IP 3, 5 & 55 Release Type: External knob manual release with or without automatic reset Through Shaft Capability: Yes (IP 3 only) IP, 3 & 5 (formerly referred to by Stearns as NEMA type, & respectively) IP 55, 56, & 57 (formerly referred to by Stearns as NEMA Type (BISSC Certified with epoxy coating and stainless steel hardware on exterior, or with a stainless steel enclosure) Universal mounting through lb-ft. The 0 and 5 lb-ft are supplied with springs for vertical modification Series Specifications: Lead Wire Length: inches Maximum Speed: Horizontal 00 rpm Vertical 3600 rpm Coil Insulation: Standard Class B Optional Class H (56,800 Series Class H standard) Certified: CSA File LR-65 ABS Type Approval Certified Units designed for industrial applications that fit between a standard C-Face motor and gear reducer. Can also be used to retrofit installed units without braking capability. Construction: Die cast aluminum endplate and housing Available Enclosures: IP 3, 5, 55 & 56 Release Type: External knob release with automatic reset C-face brake has output shaft 5600 Series Designed for industrial applications requiring the protection of a heavy duty cast iron enclosure. Construction: Cast iron endplate and housing. Available Enclosures: IP 56 & 57 Release Type: External side lever release with automatic reset Through Shaft Capability: Yes 560 Series Same as Series with 8TC / 8TC mounting. Construction: Cast iron endplate with stamped steel housing (Direct mount to 8TC / 8TC) Available Enclosures: IP 3, 5 & 55 Release Type: External knob manual release with or without automatic reset Through Shaft Capability: Yes (IP 3 only) Series For use in severe environments found in process industries such as food, pulp and paper mills and chemical plants. Construction: Stainless steel Release Type: Side lever with automatic reset Available Enclosures: IP 56 & IP 57 Through Shaft Capability: with IP3 rating only Also Available Series Full die cast aluminum endplate and housing with internal release lever Available Enclosures: IP 3, 56 & Series Die cast aluminum endplate with stamped steel housing and external maintained release, IP 5600 Series Cast iron endplate with stamped steel housing and external knob release Available Enclosures: IP 3 & Series Cast iron endplate and housing with internal release lever Available Enclosures: IP 3, 56 & 57 0

11 Series 56,000; 56,00; 56,00; 56,300; 56,00; 56,0; 56,600; 56,700; and 56,900 Mounting Face: NEMA 56C, 3TC and TC Engineering Specifications Maximum Solenoid Cycle Rate: 36 cycles/min 0 cycles/min Thermal Capacity: Horizontal 9 hp-sec/min ( watts) Vertical 6.5 hp-sec/min (80 watts) Maximum solenoid cycle rate is based on ambient temperature of 7 F ( C) with % duty cycle. Does not relate to brake cycle rate (see Thermal Capacity). Thermal capacity rating is based on ambient temperature of 7 F ( C), stop time of one second or less, with no heat absorbed from motor. Refer to Selection Procedure Section. Static lb-ft Coil Size T T.5-5, K, K+, M+ 5 Brake set and release times in milliseconds, when brake and motor are switched separately (for T/T definitions, see page 0): Series 56,000; 56,00; 56,300; 56,0; and 56,700 Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm).5-3 (-) 6 (8) 0 () Number of Friction Discs Coil Size Inertia (WK ) K K + K+ K+ lb-ft (kgm x 0 - ).008 (3.36).008 (3.36).0 (5.88) (0) K+ M+.0 (5.88) 0 (7) 5 (3) 3 3 K+ M+ M+ P+.00 (8.0).00 (8.0) Series 56,00; 56,00; 56,600; and 56,900 Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) No. of Friction discs Coil Size Inertia (WK ) lb-ft (kgm x 0 - ) 3-6 (-8) +.0 (5.88) 0 () K K+.0 (5.88) (0) K+ M+.0 (5.88) 0 (7) 3 K+ M+.00 (8.0) 5 (3) 3 M+ P+.00 (8.0) Ordering and Identification Information The following example and tables provide information for selecting the appropriate three-letter suffix when ordering a Stearns Brake. Example of a complete part number: BFF Lead wire position (internal and external, Series left and right) standard Enclosure Hub Selection Character Bore (in.) 30 Vac 5/8 bore and 3/6 x 3/3 keyway Keyway** (in. x in.) Current Ratings (amperes) Solenoid Coil Size* Current Inrush 3.6 Holding.3 + Inrush Holding K Inrush.3 Holding.3 K+ Inrush.6 Holding. M Inrush 3.0 Holding.6 M+ Inrush.6 Holding. P+ Inrush Holding Voltage: 60 Hz Voltage: Hz Voltage: Motor Frame Adapters: Series 56,000 through 56,600 WARNING! Before selecting an adapter to mount a brake on a larger motor frame, the torque and thermal capacity required by the application should be determined as shown in the Selection Procedure section. A larger motor may indicate a requirement for greater thermal capacity than the brake is designed for. The brake selection must be matched to the motor and application requirements, before use of an adapter is considered. To Adapt to NEMA Frame Size 8TC 8TC 3TC TC 5TC 56TC AK Dim. in. (mm) 8. (.90) 8. (.90) 8. (.90) 8. (.90) Reg. No Brake Enclosure IP 3 IP 5 IP 3 IP 5 Brake & Adapter Stock Number List $ List $ List $ List $ Additional Shaft Length Required in. (mm).9 (3.8).9 (3.8).9 (3.8).9 (3.8) 56,300 Series have NEMA enclosure. For adapter dimensions, see Technical Data Character Voltage Hz B 60 D 0 E F H 0 L M N O 0/0 P / Q A* B C D E F* K L* N* O* P* R* S* Z 5/8 5/8 3/ 7/8 -/8 -/ / 9/6 /6 -/6 3/6 / /60 90/380 /8 x /6 3/6 x 3/3 3/6 x 3/3 3/6 x 3/3 / x /8 / x /8 /8 x /6 / x /8 /8 x /6 3/6 x 3/3 / x /8 3/6 x 3/3 / x /8 pilot bore Minimum bore is.0. Maximum allowable bore is.5. (maximum shaft length not to exceed end of hub). For through-shaft applications,.875 is maximum *These bores are non-standard. Add $5.00 to list price. **Keyseats made to ANSI B7. Standard. Standard Voltage Ratings 60 Direct Current Character T U V W Y Z R 00/00 60 Modifications are availablesee SAB Modification Section Voltage Consult factory if other voltage is needed. Voltages below 70V are polarity sensitive. Dimensional Drawings are on the pages following.

12 Series 56,000 ( ) & Series 56, ( ) Mounting Face: NEMA 56C, 3TC and TC.5 AK, 5.88 AJ Series 56,000 Pricing (Discount Symbol B) Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes request certified prints. Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm).5 () 3 () 6 (8) 0 () (0) 0 (7) 5 (3) Series 56,000-80* Pricing (Discount Symbol B) Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) Enclosure Basic Model Number and ** List Price** List Price** IP $ $ IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP ,05.00 IP IP , IP ,30.00 IP ,0.00 IP ,5.00 IP ,30.00 IP ,05.00 IP ,0.00 IP , ,3.00 IP ,00.00 IP , , IP , ,0.00 Enclosure Basic Model Number and ** List Price** List Price**.5 () IP * $ * $ () IP * * (8) IP * * () IP * * (0) IP * *, (7) IP * *, (3) IP * *,70.00 Enclosure: Lightweight Steel Housing, Aluminum Endplate Enclosure Protection: IP 3, 5 & 55 (formerly referred to by Stearns as NEMA, & * respectively) (*BISSC certified) Mounting: Fanguard mounted brakes requiring IP 5 or IP 55 protection may require additional sealing measures beyond seals provided with the brake. Refer to Installation & Service Instruction sheets. Installation and Service: P/N Parts List: P/N Modifications: Pages 5-63 IP 3 Dimensions Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm).5 () A Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) C Hub AG G Width J Wt lbs (Kg) 8 (3.6) 3 () 8 (3.6) 6 (8) (03.) (3.) (0.6) (3.) (7.9) 8 (3.6) 0 () 8 (3.6) (0) 8 (3.6) 0 (7) (.0) 5 (3) (.3) (3.) (30.0) (.) (7.9) 9 (.0) IP 5 / 55 Dimensions Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) A Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) C Hub AG G Width J Wt lbs (Kg).5 () 8 (3.6) 3 () (03.) (.9) (0.6) (30.7) (9.) 8 (3.6) 6 (8) 8 (3.6) 0 () 9 (.0) (0) (.0) 0 (7) (.6) (.0) (30.0) (.) (9.) 9 (.0) 5 (3) 9 (.0) * 56, Series includes a C-face gasket only, no hub seal. ** Subtract $30.00 for brake ordered less hub.

13 Series 56,00 (-056-) Cast Iron & Series 56,900 (-056-9) Stainless Steel Mounting Face: NEMA 56C, 3TC and TC.5 AK, 5.88 AJ Installation and Service: P/N Modifications: Pages ,00 Series: Heavy Duty Cast Iron Enclosure Parts List: P/N Enclosure: IP 56 & 57 (formerly referred to by Stearns as NEMA Type, BISSC Certified) Mounting: Fanguard-mounted brakes requiring IP 56 or IP 57 protection may require additional sealing measures beyond seals provided with the brake - Refer to Installation & Service Instruction Sheets. Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes request certified prints. IP 56 / IP 57 Dimensions Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) 3 () Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) A AG C Hub Width G Wt lbs (Kg) 56,00 Wt lbs (Kg) 56,900 7 (7.7) 7 (7.7) 6 (8) 7 (7.7) 7 (7.7) 0 () (8.0) 7 (7.7) (0) (8.6) (.0) (30.0) (.) 8 (8.0) 7 (7.7) 0 (7) (9.5) (9.5) 5 (3) (9.5) (9.5) 56,900 Series: Stainless Steel Enclosure Parts List: P/N Enclosure Protection: IP 56 & 57 (formerly referred to by Stearns as NEMA Type ) Mounting: Fanguard-mounted brakes requiring IP 56 or IP 57 protection may require additional sealing measures beyond seals provided with the brake - Refer to Installation & Service Instruction Sheets. Series 56,900 Pricing (Discount Symbol B) Nominal Static Enclosure lb-ft (Nm) Basic Model Number and * List Price* List Price* 3 () IP $3, $3, (8) IP , , () IP , , (0) IP , , (7) IP , , (3) IP , ,75.00 Series 56,00 Pricing (Discount Symbol B) Nominal Static Enclosure lb-ft (Nm) 3 () 6 (8) 0 () (0) 0 (7) 5 (3) Basic Model Number and * List Price* List Price* IP $, $,6.00 IP , ,75.00 IP , ,7.00 IP , , IP , ,80.00 IP , , IP , ,90.00 IP , , IP , , IP , , IP , ,00.00 IP , ,75.00 * Subtract $30.00 for brake ordered less hub. 3

14 Series 56,300 (-056-3) Mounting Face: NEMA 56C, 3TC and TC,.5 AK, 5.88 AJ 56,300 Series Enclosure: IP (formerly referred to by Stearns as NEMA ), Stamped steel housing, cast aluminum endplate Release Type: Lever, maintained Parts List: P/N Installation and Service: P/N Series 56,300 Pricing (Discount Symbol B) Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) Basic Model Number and * List Price* List Price*.5 () $ $ () (8) () (0) , (7) , (3) ,.00 IP Dimensions Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) A AG C Hub Width G Wt lbs (Kg).5 () 8 (3.6) 3 () 8 (3.6) 6 (8) (0.9) (.0) (0.6) (30.7) 8 (3.6) 0 () 8 (3.6) (0) 8 (3.6) 0 (7) (.0) 5 (3) (3.3) (.0) (30.0) (.) 9 (.0) *Subtract $30.00 for brake ordered less hub. Series 56,00 (-056-) 56,00 Series: Stamped steel housing, cast iron endplate. Enclosure Protection: IP 3 & 5 (formerly referred to by Stearns as NEMA & respectively) Release Type: Knob, maintained Mounting: Fanguard-mounted brakes requiring IP 5 protection may require additional sealing measures beyond seals provided with the brake - Refer to Installation & Service Instruction sheets Parts List: P/N Installation and Service: P/N Series 56,00 Pricing (Discount Symbol B) Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) 3 () 6 (8) 0 () (0) 0 (7) 5 (3) Enclosure Basic Model Number and * List Price* List Price* IP IP , IP , IP ,0.00 IP ,05.00 IP ,5.00 IP ,05.00 IP , ,35.00 IP ,95.00 IP , ,30.00 IP , , IP , ,55.00 IP 3 Dimensions Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) 3 () Dimensions in Inches (mm) A C Hub Width G Wt lbs (Kg) (5.0) 6 (8) (5.0) 0 () (5.0) (3.3) (30.0) (.) (0) (5.5) 0 (7) (5.5) 5 (3) 3 (6.0) IP 5 Dimensions Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) 3 () Dimensions in Inches (mm) A C Hub Width G Wt lbs (Kg) (5.5) 6 (8) (5.5) 0 () (5.5) (0) (.6) (30.0) (.) 3 (6.0) 0 (7) 3 (6.0) 5 (3) 3 (6.0) *Subtract $30.00 for brake ordered less hub.

15 Series 56,00 (-056-) Die Cast Aluminum & Series 56,600 (-056-6) Cast Iron Mounting Face: NEMA 56C, 3TC and TC,.5 AK, 5.88 AJ Release Type: Internal Lever, Non-Maintained Installation and Service: P/N Modifications: Pages 5-63 Enclosure Protection: IP 3; 56 & 57 (formerly referred to by Stearns as NEMA, & respectively) Visual Wear Indicator Mounting: Fanguard-mounted brakes requiring IP 56 or IP 57 protection may require additional sealing measures beyond seals provided with the brake - Refer to Installation & Service Instruction sheets 56,00 Series: Die Cast aluminum enclosure Parts List: P/N ,600 Series: Cast iron enclosure Parts List: P/N Series 56,00 Dimensions Series 56,600 Dimensions Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm).5- (-0) 0-5 (7-3).5-6 (-8) 0-5 (-3) Enclosure IP 3 IP 56/57 Dimensions in Inches (mm) C Hub A AG G Width. (.0) (.0) (3.). (.3).95 (.7).7 (.9).59 (.0).8 (0.6).8 (30.0).8 (0.6).8 (30.0). (30.7).66 (.). (30.7).66 (.) Wt lbs (Kg) 8 (3.6) 0 (.5) 8 (3.6) 0 (.5) Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) Enclosure 3-5 (-3) IP (-3) IP 56/57 Dimensions in Inches (mm) C Hub A AG G Width.95 (.7) (.0) (8.3).8 (30.0).66 (.) Wt lbs (Kg) (9.5) Series 56,00 Pricing (Discount Symbol B) Series 56,600 Pricing (Discount Symbol B) Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm).5 () 3 () 6 (8) 0 () (0) 0 (7) 5 (3) Enclosure Basic Model Number and * List Price* List Price* IP $ $ IP IP ,0.00 IP IP IP , IP IP ,05.00 IP ,00.00 IP IP ,30.00 IP ,05.00 IP , IP ,30.00 IP , , IP ,80.00 IP , ,3.00 IP , , IP ,75.00 IP , ,0.00 IP , ,85.00 Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) 3 () 6 (8) 0 () (0) 0 (7) 5 (3) Enclosure Basic Model Number and * List Price* List Price* IP , ,0.00 IP , , IP , ,70.00 IP , , IP , , IP , , IP , , IP , , IP , , IP , , IP , , IP , , IP , , IP , , IP , , IP , ,9.00 IP , , IP , ,60.00 * Subtract $30.00 for brake ordered less hub.

16 Series 56,0 (-056-5) Mounting Face: NEMA 8TC and 8TC 8.5 AK, 7.5 AJ Enclosure Material: Stamped Steel Housing, Cast Iron Endplate Enclosure Protection: IP 3, 5 & 55 (formerly referred to by Stearns as NEMA, & *) * BISSC Certified Release Type: Knob, Maintained with Automatic Reset Mounting: Fanguard-mounted brakes requiring IP 5 or IP 55 protection may require additional sealing measures beyond seals provided with the brake - Refer to Installation & Service Instruction sheets. Installation and Service: P/N Parts List: P/N Modifications: Pages 5-63 * Hub location. Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes request certified prints. IP 3 Dimensions Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) 0 () Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) A C Hub Width J Wt lbs (Kg) (6.) (0) (6.) 0 (7) (3.3) (0.6) (7.9) (6.) 5 (3) (6.8) IP 5 / 55 Dimensions Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) 0 () Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) A C Hub Width J Wt lbs (Kg) (6.) (0) (6.) 0 (7) (.6) (30.0) (9.) (6.8) 5 (3) (6.8) Unit Pricing (Discount Symbol B) 6 Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) 0 () (0) 0 (7) 5 (3) Enclosure Basic Model Number and * List Price* List Price* IP $ $,0.00 IP ,80.00 IP , , IP ,0.00 IP , , IP , ,55.00 IP , , IP , ,65.00 IP , ,50.00 IP , ,5.00 IP , , IP , , * Subtract $30.00 for brake ordered less hub.

17 Series 87,000 and 87,00 Mounting Face: NEMA 8TC - 56TC/UC The 87,00** Series have the following design features: Engineering Specifications Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) 6 (8) 0 () (0) 5 (3) 35 (7) (68) 75 (0) 05 () (69) No. of Friction Discs Coil Size Maximum Solenoid Cycle Rate Cycles/ min Maximum solenoid cycle rate is based on ambient temperature of 7 F ( C) with % duty cycle. Does not relate to brake cycle rate (see Thermal Capacity). Thermal capacity rating is based on ambient temperature of 7 F ( C), stop time of one second or less, with no heat absorbed from motor. Derate thermal capacity by 5% for vertical mounting. Refer to Selection Procedure Section. 87,800 Thermal capacity is hp-sec/min (7 watts). Current Ratings (amperes) Solenoid Coil Size Self-Adjusting Design Splined Hub Lead Wire Length: inches ** Does not include 87,300 and 87,700 Series brakes. Current Thermal Capacity hp-sec/ min (watts) 7.5 (8) 7.5 (8) 7.5 (8) 7.5 (8) 7.5 (8) 7.5 (8) 7.5 (8) 7.5 (8) 0.0 (8) Inertia (Wk ) lb-ft (kgm x 0 - ) 87,000 87,00.08 (0.3).08 (0.3).08 (0.3).08 (0.3).08 (0.3).089 (37.0).089 (37.0).9 (5.5) 87, (37.0).089 (37.0).9 (5.5).9 (5.5).078 (3.76).078 (3.76).078 (3.76).078 (3.76).08 (5.36).08 (5.36). (60.90) Voltage: 60 Hz Voltage: Hz Voltage: inrush holding inrush holding inrush holding Motor Frame Adapters/Special Endplate To Adapt to NEMA Frame Size 56C, 3TC, or TC 8TFC, 8TFC 8TC 86TC in. (mm). (.30) 0. (66.70) Reg. No metric -0 3TC, 36TC, 36TC, 365TC, 0TC or 05TC 8TC/8TC, 3TC, TC, 5TC/56TC. (37.) (.90) -03 Maximum Speed: Horizontal 000 rpm Vertical 3600 rpm (modification required for vertical mounting), see SAB Modification Section Adapter Stock Number Brake endplate is modified for. in AK. Adder below* List $, List $.00 Endplate modified for 30mm register (AK) & 65mm bolt circle (AJ). Add: Brake w/aluminum endplate $75.00 includes adder for cast iron endplate. Brake with cast iron endplate: $ List $ Endplate modified to provide a 6.75 male register (AK) and 7.9 bolt circle (AJ). Adder below* Extended endplate. Adder below* *Brakes with aluminum endplate: $75.00 (includes adder for cast iron endplate) *Brakes with cast iron endplate: $30 For motor frame adapters: Series 87,000 through 87,800 see Technical Data Additional Shaft Length Required in. (mm) ( ).56 (.).8 (0.6).88 (.).65 (,88) Coil Insulation: Standard Class B Optional Class H (Class H standard on 87,800) Certified: CSA File LR-65 ABS Type Approval Certified Ordering and Identification Information The following example and tables provide information for selecting the appropriate three-letter suffix when ordering a Stearns Brake. Example of a complete part number: BFF Lead wire position (internal and external, Series left and right) 30 Vac Enclosure 5/8 bore and 3/6 x 3/3 keyway Modification Endplate Hub Selection Character A* B* C* D E F G H I* J* K* L* M* N* O* P* Q* R* S* T* U* Z Bore (in.) 5/8 5/8 3/ 7/8 -/8 -/ -3/8-5/8-3/ -7/8 / -/ 9/6 /6 -/6-7/6 3/6 /6-3/6-5/6.600 Standard Voltage Ratings Character Voltage Hz B 60 D 0 E Maximum allowable bore.875 (maximum shaft length not to exceed end of hub). For thru-shaft applications.65 is maximum. *These bores are non-standard. Add $.00 to list price. **Keyseats made to ANSI B7. standard. Direct Current Character Voltage T U V 36 W 8 95 Y Z 30 Consult factory if other voltage is needed. Keyway** (in. x in.) /8 x /6 3/6 x 3/3 3/6 x 3/3 3/6 x 3/3 / x /8 / x /8 5/6 x 5/3 3/8 x 3/6 3/8 x 3/6 / x / /8 x /6 / x /8 3/8 x 3/6 /8 x /6 3/6 x 3/3 / x /8 3/8 x 3/6 3/6 x 3/3 / x /8 / x /8 5/6 x 5/3 pilot bore Modifications are availablesee SAB Modification Section Dimensional drawings are on the pages following. F H 0 L M N O 0/0 P /30 60 Q 30/60 90/ R 00/

18 Series 87,000 Mounting Face: NEMA 8TC 8TC, 3TC, TC, 5TC, and 56TC (Note: for 8TFC and 8TFC mounting, add a -05- register) 8.5 AK, 7.5 AJ Static : 6 through 05 lb-ft Enclosure Material: IP 3 - Sheet Metal Housing, Aluminum Endplate. IP 5 & 55 - Cast Iron Housing and Endplate. IP 5 & 55 also available in sheet metal housing, aluminum endplate. IP 56 - Cast iron housing and endplate. Enclosure Protection: IP 3, 5 55 (formerly referred to as NEMA, & * respectively) & IP 56. *BISSC Certified Release Type: Pull Release Knob, maintained with automatic reset. Vertical above IP 5 & 55 supplied with side manual release lever; and all Cast Iron IP 55 brakes supplied with side manual release lever. Installation, Service and Parts List: P/N Rev. B brakes Mounting: Horizontal, unless modified for vertical. Vertical mounting is defined as or more from horizontal. Vertical above requires modification. Vertical below requires modification on -05 lb-ft brakes. Vertical above IP 5/55 includes side manual release. See SAB Modification Section for list price adders. Fanguard-mounted brakes requiring IP 5 or IP 55 protection may require additional sealing measures beyond seals provided with the brake - Refer to Installation & Service Instruction sheets. Specifications including bore sizes/voltages: Page 7 Modifications: Pages 5-63 Including New Manual Adjust Option Outline Drawing for Cast Iron Housing and Endplate IP 5 & 55 Static Coil Size T T 0,, 5, 5 & , 75, Brake set and release times in milliseconds, when brake and motor are switched separately (for T/T definitions, see page 0): Outline Drawing for and Sheet Metal Housing, Aluminum Endplate IP 3, 5 & 55 * Hub location. Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes request certified prints. * Hub location. 8

19 Series 87,000 Dimensional Data IP 3 Enclosure - aluminum & steel Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) 6 (8) 0 () (0) 5 (3) 35 (7) (68) 75 (0) 05 () Basic Model Number and * List Price* List Price* $ $, , , , , , , , , , , , ,70.00 Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) A AE AG 7.38 (87.3) 7.88 (00.0) 8.38 (.7) IP 5 and IP 55 Enclosure - CAST IRON.8 (6.0).3 (58.7).8 (7.).68 (7.9).97 (.6).97 (.6) C Hub Width.00 (5.0). (38.0).00 (.80) Wt. lbs (kg)** 0 (9.0) 0 (9.0) (0.0) (0.0) (.0) (0.0) 7 (.) 33 (.0) Discount Symbol B B B B3 B3 B3 B3 B3 Nominal Static Enclosure lb-ft (Nm) 6 (8) 0 () (0) 5 (3) 35 (7) (68) 75 (0) 05 () (69) IP 5 IP 55 IP 5 IP 55 IP 5 IP 55 IP 5 IP 55 IP 5 IP 55 IP 5 IP 55 IP 5 IP 55 IP 5 IP 55 IP 5 IP B B B B B B B B B0 Basic Model Number and * List Price* $,55.00 $,780.00,55.00,780.00,575.00,830.00,6.00,905.00,800.00,055.00,00.00,355.00,600.00, , , ,800.00, B B B B B B B B B0 List Price* $, $,3.00,095.00,3.00,.00,00.00,0.00,75.00,370.00,65.00 Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) A AE AG 7.56 (9.09),670.00, ,70.00 (0.79) 3,5.00 3,870.00,.00,370.00, (7.9) 8.56 (7.9).8 (6.0).3 (58.7).8 (7.).8 (7.).68 (7.9).97 (.6).97 (.6).97 (.6) C Hub Width.00 (5.0). (38.0).00 (.80).00 (.80) Wt. lbs (kg)** (0.0) (0.0) 6 (.0) 6 (.0) 8 (.7) 5 (3.0) 5 (.0) Discount Symbol B B B B3 B3 B3 B3 56 (5.) B3 56 (5.) B3 IP 5 and IP 55 Enclosure - Lightweight ALUMINUM & STEEL Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) 6 (8) 0 () (0) 5 (3) 35 (7) (68) 75 (0) 05 () Enclosure IP 5 IP 55 IP 5 IP 55 IP 5 IP 55 IP 5 IP 55 IP 5 IP 55 IP 5 IP 55 IP 5 IP 55 IP 5 IP B B B B B B B B0 Basic Model Number and * List Price* $,.00 $,5.00,.00,5.00,75.00,75.00,.00,5.00,00.00,700.00,700.00,000.00,00.00,0.00, ,00.00 List Price* Contact factory Contact factory Contact factory Contact factory Contact factory Contact factory Contact factory Contact factory Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) A AE AG 7.3 (88.59) 7.93 (0.8) 8.3 (3.97).8 (6.0).3 (58.7).8 (7.).68 (7.9).97 (.6).97 (.6) C Hub Width.00 (5.0). (38.0).00 (.80) Wt. lbs (kg)** 9 (8.6) 9 (8.6) 0 (9.0) 0 (9.0) (0.0) 3 (0.) 3 (0.) (.0) Discount Symbol B B B B3 B3 B3 B3 B3 * Subtract $5.00 for brake ordered less hub. ** Foot mounting adds 7 lbs. (3. kg) to weight. These model numbers and list prices include non-standard friction discs. For high inertia or overhauling loads, it is recommended that 8,000 or 8,000 series brakes be used, as these brakes have substantially higher thermal capacities (% higher for 8,000 series and % higher for 8,000 series). 9

20 Series 87,000 Enclosure Protection: IP 56 Enclosure Material: Cast Iron Housing & Endplate Dimensional Data Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) Enclosure Basic Model Number and * * Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) A C AG AE SL min max Discount Symbol 5 (3) IP $3,860 Consult Factory $, B3 35 (7) IP $3,875 Consult Factory $, B3 (68) IP $3,95 Consult Factory $, B3 75 (0) IP $3,975 Consult Factory $, B3 05 () IP $,075 * Subtract $5.00 for brake ordered less hub. Consult Factory $, B3 SL max for.875 max dia. shaft =.3 for & 75 lb-ft brakes, &.8 for 05 lb-ft brake Specifications Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) No. of Friction Discs Coil Size Maximum Solenoid Cycle Rate cycles/min Thermal Capacity hp-sec/min (watts) Inertia (Wk ) lb-ft (kgm x 0 - ) Wt. Lbs (kg)** 5 (3) (.8).089 (37.0) 75 (3) 35 (7) (.8).089 (37.0) 75 (3) (68) (.8).089 (37.0) 75 (3) 75 (0) (.8).089 (37.0) 76 (3.5) 05 () (.8).9 (5.5) 80 (36.3) 0

21 Series 87,00 (-087-) Mounting Face: NEMA 8TC, 8UC, 86TC and 86UC 0.5 AK, 9.0 AJ Static : through lb-ft Enclosure Material: IP 3 - Sheet Metal Housing, Cast Iron Endplate. IP 5 - Cast Iron Housing and Endplate Release Type: Knob, maintained with automatic reset. Vertical above IP 5 supplied with side release lever. Enclosure Protection: IP 3 & 5 (formerly referred to by Stearns as NEMA Type &, respectively. Installation, Service and Parts List: P/N Rev. B brakes Mounting: Horizontal, unless modified for vertical. Vertical mounting is defined as or more from horizontal. Vertical above and vertical below require modification. Vertical above NEMA / includes side manual release. See SAB Modification Section for detail and list price adders. Fanguard mounted brakes requiring IP 5 protection may require additional sealing measures beyond seals provided with the brake - Refer to Installation and Service Instruction sheets. Specifications including bore sizes/voltages: Page 7 Modifications: Pages 5-63 Including New Manual Adjust Option Brake set and release times in milliseconds, when brake and motor are switched separately (for T/T definitions, see page 0): Static Coil Size T T , 75, 05, * Hub location Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes request certified prints. Dimensional Data/Unit Pricing (Discount Symbol B3) Nominal Static (lb-ft) (Nm) Enclosure Basic Model Number and * List Price* List Price* IP $, $, (96.85) IP , , (0.68) 75 IP , , (96.85) 75 IP , , (0.68) 05 IP , , (09.55) 05 IP , , (.3) IP , , (09.55) IP , , (.3) * Subtract $5.00 for brake ordered less hub. Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) A AE AG C.9 (55.56).9 (55.56).9 (55.56).9 (55.56).69 (68.6).69 (68.6).69 (68.6).69 (68.6).97 (.6).97 (.6).97 (.6).97 (.6).97 (.6).97 (.6).97 (.6).97 (.6). (38.0). (38.0). (38.0). (38.0).00 (.80).00 (.80).00 (.80).00 (.80) Wt. lbs (kg) 0 (8.0) 53 (.0) (0.0) 5 (3.6) 6 (9.0) 58 (6.3) 6 (9.0) 58 (6.3) These model numbers and list prices include non-standard friction discs. For high inertia or overhauling loads, it is recommended that 8,000 or 8,000 series brakes be used, as these brakes have substantially higher thermal capacities (% higher for 8,000 series and % higher for 8,000 series).

22 Series 8,000 and 8,000 Mounting Face NEMA 3 and 36TC, TSC, UC or USC, NEMA 36 and 365TC, TSC, UC or USC NEMA 0 and 05 TC, TSC, UC or USC 8,000 Series Specifications Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) (69) 75 (37) 30 (3) Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) (69) 75 (37) 30 (3) 330 (7) 0 (597) No. of Friction Discs 3 No. of Friction Discs K9 K9 Coil Size Coil Size Maximum Solenoid Cycle Rate cycles/min 8,000 Series Specifications Maximum Solenoid Cycle Rate cycles/min 3 3 hp-sec/min (watts) 30 (373) 30 (373) 30 (373) Thermal Capacity hp-sec/min (watts) (6) (6) (6) (6) (6) lb-ft (kgm x 0-3 ).9 (8.06).9 (8.06).80 (.76) Inertia (Wk ) lb-ft (kgm x 0-3 ).90 (0.58).90 (0.58).70 (9.57).70 (9.57).98 (38.56) Maximum solenoid cycle rate is based on ambient temperature of 7 F ( C) with % duty cycle. Does not relate to brake cycle rate (see Thermal Capacity). Thermal capacity rating is based on ambient temperature of 7 F ( C) stop time of one second or less, with no heat absorbed from motor. Refer to Selection Procedure Section. Derate thermal capacity by 5% for vertical mounting. Thermal Capacity Inertia (Wk ) Current Ratings (amperes) Coil Size Frequency Current Voltage Inrush Holding Hz Hz Hz K Hz Ordering and Identification Information The following example and tables provide information for selecting the appropriate three-letter suffix when ordering a Stearns Brake. Example of a complete part number, Series 8,000: NLF Lead wire position (internal and external, left and right) 60 Vac -/8 bore and / x / keyway 8,000 Series Hub Selection Character A B* C D Character A B* C D E* F G* H I* J K* L* M* N O* P* Q* R S* T W Bore (in.) /8 / 3/8 / 9/6 5/8 /6 3/ 3/6 7/8 /6 /6 /8 3/6 / 5/6 3/8 7/6 / /8 Keyway** (in. x in.) / /8 / /8 5/6 5/3 3/8 3/6 3/8 3/6 3/8 3/6 3/8 3/6 3/8 3/6 / x / / x / / x / / x / / x / / x / / x / / x / 5/8 x 5/6 5/8 x 5/6 5/8 x 5/6 5/8 x 5/6 pilot bore Maximum allowable bore.0 in. (76.00 mm)(maximum shaft length not to exceed end of hub). *These bores are non-standard. Add $ to. **Keyseats made to ANSI B7. standard. 8,000 Series Hub Selection Standard Voltage Ratings Direct Current Bore Keyway** E* F G* H I* J K* L* M* N O* P* Q* R S* T U* V* W Y* Z* (in.) /8 / 3/8 / 9/6 5/8 /6 3/ 3/6 7/8 /6 /6 /8 3/6 / 5/6 3/8 7/6 / 5/8 3/ /8 7/8 /6 3 (in. x in.) / /8 / /8 5/6 5/3 3/8 3/6 3/8 3/6 3/8 3/6 3/8 3/6 3/8 3/6 / x / / x / / x / / x / / x / / x / / x / / x / 5/8 x 5/6 5/8 x 5/6 5/8 x 5/6 5/8 x 5/6 5/8 x 5/6 5/8 x 5/6 pilot bore 3/ x 3/8 3/ x 3/8 3/ x 3/8 Maximum allowable bore in. (76.00 mm) (maximum shaft length not to exceed end of hub). *These bores are non-standard. Add $ to. **Keyseats made to ANSI B7. standard. Example of a complete part number, Series 8,000: NLF Lead wire position (internal and external, left and right) 60 Vac -/8 bore and / x / keyway Character B D E F H L M N O P Q R Voltage /0 /30 30/60 90/380 00/00 Hz Character U V W Y Z Voltage Consult factory if other voltage is needed. Modifications are available- see SAB Modification Section

23 Series 8,000 (-08-0) Mounting Face: NEMA 3 and 36 TC, TSC, UC or USC, NEMA 36 and 365 TC, TSC, UC or USC, NEMA 0 and 05 TC, TSC, UC or USC.5 AK,.0 AJ Static : through 30 lb-ft Enclosure Material: Cast Iron Release Type: Knob, maintained with automatic reset. Vertical above IP 5 supplied with side release lever. Enclosure Protection: IP 3 and 5 (formerly referred to by Stearns as NEMA Type &, respectively). Mounting: Fanguard-mounted brakes requiring IP 5 protection may require additional sealing measures beyond seals provided with the brake - Refer to Installation & Service Instruction sheets. Installation, Service and Parts List: P/N Specifications, bores/voltages: Page Modifications: Pages 5-63 Modification required for vertical mounting. Vertical above IP 5 includes side release. See SAB Modifications for details and list price adders. Self-Adjusting Design Splined Hub Spring-Set Electrically Released Lead Wire Length: 36 inches Maximum Speed: 3600 Horizontal 00 Vertical Coil Insulation: Standard Class B Optional Class H Certified: CSA File LR-65 ABS Type Approval Certified Brake set and release times in milliseconds, when brake and motor are switched separately (for T/T definitions see page 0): Static Coil Size T T All * Hub location. Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes request certified prints. Dimensional Data/Unit Pricing (Discount Symbol C) Nominal Static Enclosure (lb-ft) (Nm) (69) (69) 75 (37) 75 (37) 30 (3) 30 (3) IP 3 IP 5 IP 3 IP 5 IP 3 IP 5 Type Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) Basic Model Number and A Cast AE AG C Iron $, $5, ,.00 7, ,.00 6, , ,6.00 5, ,7.00 7,.00 8, (7.6) 0.88 (76.) 0.8 (7.6) 0.88 (76.).3 (87.3).38 (88.9).56 (65.09).56 (65.09).56 (65.09).56 (65.09) 3.06 (77.79) 3.06 (77.79).9 (3.8).9 (3.8).9 (3.8).9 (3.8). (36.5). (36.5). (36.5). (36.5). (36.5). (36.5).9 (9.).9 (9.) New! 9th digit indicates aluminum or cast iron housing = Cast Iron 3 = Aluminum: Add.38 to A dimension Subtract $00.00 for brake ordered less hub. 3 Subtract lbs. for aluminum housing. Foot mounting adds 0 lbs (8. kg) to weight. Cast Iron Wt. lbs (kg) 3 8 (67.0) (69.0) 8 (67.0) (69.0) 5 (70.0) 8 (7.0) Motor Frame Adapters WARNING! Before selecting an adapter to mount a brake on a larger motor frame, the torque and thermal capacity required by the application should be determined as shown in the Selection Procedure section. A larger motor may indicate a requirement for greater thermal capacity than the brake is designed for. The brake selection must be matched to the motor and application requirements, before use of an adapter is considered. To Adapt to NEMA Frame Size 8TC or 86TC TSC and 5TSC AK Dim. in (mm) 8TC, 8TC, 8. 3TC, TC, (.90) 5TC or 56TC 0. (66.70) 6.00 (06.0) Reg. No List $ List $ List $875 For adapter dimensions, see Technical Data. -9 Adapter Stock Number Additional Shaft Length Required in. (mm).9 (3.8).9 (3.8).88 (.) 3

24 Series 8,000 (-08-0) Mounting Face: NEMA 3 and 36 TC, TSC, UC or USC, NEMA 36 and 365 TC, TSC, UC or USC, NEMA 0 and 05 TC, TSC, UC or USC.5 AK,.0 AJ Static : through 0 lb-ft Enclosure Material: Cast Iron Release Type: Knob, maintained with automatic reset. Vertical above IP 5 supplied with side release lever. Enclosure Protection: IP 3 & 5 (formerly referred to by Stearns as NEMA Type & respectively). Mounting: Fanguard-mounted brakes requiring IP 5 protection may require additional sealing measures beyond seals provided with the brake - Refer to Installation & Service Instruction sheets. Installation, Service and Parts List: P/N Rev. A brakes Specifications, bores/voltages: Page Modifications: Pages 5-63 Modification required for vertical mounting. Vertical above IP 5 includes side release. See SAB Modifications for details and list price adders. Self-Adjusting Design Splined Hub Spring-Set Electrically Released Lead Wire Length: 36 inches Maximum Speed: 3600 Horizontal 00 Vertical Coil Insulation: Standard Class B Optional Class H Certified: CSA File LR- 65 ABS Type Approval Certified Brake set and release times in milliseconds, when brake and motor are switched separately (for T/T definitions see page 0) Static Coil Size T T All Hub location flush with C-face Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes request certified prints. Dimensional Data/Unit Pricing (Discount Symbol C) Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) (69) (69) 75 (37) 75 (37) 30 (3) 30 (3) 330 (7) 330 (7) 0 (597) 0 (597) Enclosure IP 3 IP 5 IP 3 IP 5 IP 3 IP 5 IP 3 IP 5 IP 3 IP 5 Type Basic Model Number and $6, $8, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,65.00 Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) A Cast Iron AE AG C (307.98) (09.5) (.5) (58.7) (309.56) (09.5) (.5) (58.7) (307.98) (09.5) (.5) (58.7) (309.56) (09.5) (.5) (58.7) (307.98) (09.5) (60.3) (7.6) (309.56) (09.5) (60.3) (7.6) (307.98) (09.5) (60.3) (7.6) (309.56) (09.5) (60.3) (7.6) (339.7) (.9) (76.0) (90.9) 3. (3.3) 5.56 (.9) 3.00 (76.0) 3.56 (90.9) New! 9th digit indicates aluminum or cast iron housing = Cast Iron 3 = Aluminum: Add.38 to A dimension Subtract $30.00 for brake ordered less hub. 3 Subtract lbs. for aluminum housing. Foot mounting adds 0 lbs (8. kg) to weight. Cast Iron Wt. lbs (kg) 3 89 (86.0) 89 (86.0) 89 (86.0) 89 (86.0) 90 (86.0) 90 (86.0) 90 (86.0) 90 (86.0) 9 (87.0) 9 (87.0) Motor Frame Adapters WARNING! Before selecting an adapter to mount a brake on a larger motor frame, the torque and thermal capacity required by the application should be determined as shown in the Selection Procedure section. A larger motor may indicate a requirement for greater thermal capacity than the brake is designed for. The brake selection must be matched to the motor and application requirements, before use of an adapter is considered. To Adapt to NEMA Frame Size 8TC or 86TC TSC and 5TSC AK Dim. in (mm) 8TC, 8TC, 8. 3TC, TC, (.90) 5TC or 56TC 0. (66.70) 6.00 (06.0) Reg. No List $ List $ List $875 For adapter dimensions, see Technical Data. -9 Adapter Stock Number Additional Shaft Length Required in. (mm).9 (30.6).9 (30.6).75 (.5)

25 Series 86,000 (-086-) Mounting Face: NEMA and 5TC, TSC, UC or USC 6.0 AK,.0 AJ Series 86,00 (-086-) Mounting Face: NEMA 5TC, TSC, UC or USC 6.5 AK,.5 AJ Static : 0 through 000 lb-ft Enclosure Material: Cast Iron Release Type: Knob, maintained with automatic reset Enclosure Protection: IP 3 & 5 (formerly referred to by Stearns as NEMA type & respectively). Mounting: Fanguard-mounted brakes requiring IP 5 protection may require additional sealing measures beyond seals provided with the brake - Refer to Installation & Service Instruction sheets. Installation, Service and Parts List: P/N Additional 86,000 Specs: Double Solenoid Design Terminal Block Provided. Modification required for vertical mounting, available through 7 lb-ft only. See SAB Modifications for list price adders. Self-Adjusting Design Splined Hub Spring-Set Electrically Released Lead Wire Length: 36 inches Maximum Speed: 800 rpm Coil Insulation: Standard Class B Optional Class H Certified: CSA File LR-65 ABS Type Approval Certified *86,00 Series AK = 6./6.7 AJ =. Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes request certified prints. Dimensional Data/Unit Pricing (Discount Symbol C) Nominal Static (lb-ft) (Nm) 0 (678) 0 (678) 7 (07) 7 (07) 000 (356) 000 (356) Enclosure IP 3 IP 5 IP 3 IP 5 IP 3 IP 5 Type Basic Model Number and $, $6,65.00 (338.) ,0.00 8,.00,0.00 8,.00 7, , , ,0.00,.00 Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) A Cast AG C E Iron 3.38 (339.7) 3.3 (338.) 3.38 (339.7) 3.3 (338.) 3.38 (339.7).75 (9.05).69 (.86). (8.58).06 (5.39). (38.0).5 (38.). (6.9).5 (57.) 3.9 (80.96) 3.0 (76.). 3.9 (6.9) (00.0).9 (3.88).0 (0.0).9 (3.88).0 (0.0).9 (3.88).0 (0.0) Cast Iron Wt. lbs (kg) 3 30 (.0) 30 (.0) 330 (.0) 30 (.0) 3 (9.0) 360 (6.0) Motor Frame Adapters To adapt to NEMA Frame Size AK. Dim in. (mm) 3TC, 36TC,. 36TC, 365TC, (37.) 0TC or 05TC Reg. No. -3 Adapter Stock Number List $800 For adapter dimensions, see Technical Data. Additional Shaft Length Required in. (mm).38 (3.9) = 0 or. 0 designates a 6 in. AK, in AJ. designates 6.5 in. AK,.5 in. AJ. Subtract $ for brake ordered less hub. 3 Foot mounting adds 75 lbs. (3 kg) to weight. 5

26 Series 86,000 Specifications continued Engineering Specifications* Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) 0 (678) 7 (07) 000 (356) No. of Friction Discs 3 K9 K9 K9 Solenoid Size Maximum Solenoid Cycle Rate cycles/min * All specifications are also applicable to the 86,00 Series Thermal Capacity 3 hp-sec/min (watts) 80 (99) 80 (99) 80 (99) Inertia (Wk ) lb-ft (kgm x 0-3 ). (58.8). (88.).8 (7.6) Two required. Maximum solenoid cycle rate is based on ambient temperature of 7 F ( C) with % duty cycle. Does not relate to brake cycle rate (see Thermal Capacity). 3 Thermal capacity rating is based on ambient temperature of 7 F ( C), stop time of one second or less, with no heat absorbed from motor. Derate thermal capacity by 5% for vertical mounting. Refer to Selection Procedure Section. Current Ratings (amperes) Coil Size K9 9 Voltage: 60 Hz Current Inrush Holding Current Inrush Holding Current Inrush Holding V V Voltage: Hz 0 V Voltage: V V V V V 5.0. V V V V V Ordering and Identification Information The following example and tables provide information for selecting the appropriate three-letter suffix when ordering a Stearns Brake. Example of a complete part number: NLF Lead wire position (internal and external, left and right) Designate 0 for 6 in. AK, in. AJ Designate for 6.5 in. AK,.5 in. AJ 60 Vac -7/8 bore and 3/ x 3/8 keyway Hub Selection Character D H K L N P T V W Z Bore (in.) -/8-3/8-5/8-3/ -7/ /8 3-/ -7/8 Keyway* (in. x in.) / x / 5/8 x 5/6 5/8 x 5/6 5/8 x 5/6 3/ x 3/8 3/ x 3/8 7/8 x 7/6 7/8 x 7/6 pilot bore x / Maximum allowable bore.0 in. (maximum shaft length not to exceed end of hub). For through-shaft applications,.000 is maximum. *Keyseats made to ANSI B7. standard Standard Voltage Ratings Character B D E F H L M N Voltage Hz Single voltage coils only - dual voltage coils not allowed Direct Current Character U V W Y Z Voltage Contact factory if other voltage is needed. Modifications are available-see SAB Modification Section 6

27 Hazardous Location Brakes Enclosures for standard Stearns disc brakes are designed to prevent accidental contact with the internal mechanism while keeping contaminants from the operating parts. Many installations, however, require additional protection due to the presence of explosive gases or ignitable dusts in the atmosphere. Hazardous locations are defined in the National Electrical Code (NEC) and designated by Class, Division and Group. For a better understanding of hazardous locations, or for definitions of hazardous location terminology, please refer to: offerings/services/hazardouslocations/. Class I Locations where the atmosphere may contain flammable gases or vapors in explosive or ignitable concentrations. An electric disc brake for Class I locations must be built in such a manner that any ignition of gases or vapors within the brake will not result in rupture of the enclosure or allow a flame or spark to travel from within the brake to the surrounding hazardous atmosphere. Class II Locations with combustible dust in suspension in the atmosphere. An electric disc brake for Class II locations must be enclosed in a manner which precludes entry of ignitable dusts or exit of any arcs, sparks, or hot gases which may cause ignition of dusts suspended in the surrounding atmosphere or accumulated on the enclosure. The exterior surface temperature of the brake enclosure must be limited so that it can function at its maximum-rated duty cycle without causing dehydration or carbonization of dust that accumulates on the enclosure. Divisions Each hazardous-location Class is also divided into two Divisions, and. Division is a normally hazardous location. Division is normally not hazardous. Division brakes can be used in both types of locations. Division can be used in Division environments ONLY. Groups Class I gases and vapors are listed in four Groups A, B, C and D, based on specific properties such as maximum explosion pressure and ignition temperature. Class II airborne dusts are listed in three Groups: E, F, and G. The dust properties considered include thermal and electrical conductivity and ignition temperature. Selection When specifying a Stearns hazardouslocation disc brake, the Class and Group designations of the hazardous atmosphere and its ignition temperature must be known. The selection table gives the hazardous atmospheres that Stearns brakes are suitable for, along with the brake s maximum operating temperature. For more information on hazardous location responsibilities, see: offerings/services/hazardouslocations/ Step Determine the Class and Group designation of the hazardous atmosphere. Step For Class I hazardous substances, determine the ignition temperature of the explosive gas or vapor. Select a brake listed for the appropriate group with a maximum external surface temperature that does not exceed the ignition temperature of the explosive gas or vapor. Step 3 For Class II hazardous substances, select a brake listed for the appropriate group. Ignition temperatures of Combustible Dusts may be found in NFPA publication NFPA 99 Recommended Practice for the Classification of Combustible Dusts and of Hazardous (Classified) Locations for Electrical Installations in Chemical Process Areas. Ignition temperatures of Flammable Liquids, Gases and Vapors may be found in NFPA publication NFPA 97 Recommended Practice for the Classification of Flammable Liquids, Gases and Vapors and of Hazardous (Classified) locations for Electrical Installations in Chemical Process Areas. Brake Labels and Listing Stearns brakes for use in hazardous locations are marked to show the Class, Group, and maximum Class II operating temperature (in a 0 C ambient) of the brake enclosure, as well as the minimum Class I ignition temperature of the gases or vapors to which they can be exposed. Generally, compliance with the NEC is demonstrated by UL Listing of the product in Underwriters Laboratories Hazardous Location Equipment Directory. A label displaying the UL Listing mark and required rating information will be found on each Stearns brake to confirm the Listing. In Canada, the Canadian Standards Association (CSA) is an organization with the responsibility to publish and administer national electrical standards as well as to test and certify electrical products. The CUL or CSA monogram will be found on Stearns hazardous-location brakes sold in Canada to confirm certification. Stearns motor-mounted, hazardouslocation electric disc brakes are Listed only when mounted directly to a Listed hazardous-location motor of the same Class and Group at the motor manufacturer s facility, and where the combination has been accepted by UL. This procedure completes the explosionproof assembly of the brake. However, foot-mounted Listed hazardouslocation disc brakes are also available for coupling to a motor, and may be installed by anyone. These brakes are listed by UL (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,) for use in certain locations classified as hazardous. Installation and servicing must be in compliance with all existing local safety codes. All wiring and electrical connections must comply with the National Electric Code (NEC) and local electrical codes in effect at the time. For additional information see the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) website HazLoc inspection authorities are responsible for verifying and authorizing the use of suitably designed, manufactured and installed HazLoc equipment. When questions arise always consult the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for directions and approvals. Hazardous-Location Brake Enclosures Division, hazardous location brakes are typically provided with machined components, without gaskets. Series brakes can be provided with gaskets to meet IP 55, 56 or Type enclosure protection. Series brakes can be provided with gaskets to meet IP 55, 56 or 57 enclosure protection. Series 8300 can be provided with IP 56 enclosure protection. All Division enclosures prevent flame propagation to the outside atmosphere through tortuous flame paths having controlled clearances. If the brake is used in a high humidity or low temperature environment, internal electric heaters should be used. Division hazardous location brakes are provided with an IP 55 enclosure. Heater and proximity switch options are limited to Division, Class II brakes. 7

28 Thermal Considerations A major design requirement of hazardous-location brakes is to limit exterior surface temperature. The surface temperature of the enclosure must not exceed a specified limit as a result of heat energy created in stopping the motor and load. This NEC restriction on the exterior surface temperature limits the hazardous-location brake s ability to dissipate heat, resulting in less thermal capacity than a comparable brake with a standard or dust-tight, waterproof enclosure. THEREFORE, HAZARDOUS-LOCATION BRAKES ARE INTENDED ESSENTIALLY FOR NON-CYCLIC OR HOLDING PURPOSES, BUT MAY BE USED FOR STOPPING LIGHT INERTIAL LOADS. Hazardous Location Brake Selection Table Class I II Classification Group Minimum Auto-Ignition Temperature of Atmosphere Minimum Layer or Cloud Ignition Temperature T Code Brake Series Division Brake Series Division A 60 C / 30 F T3C 56800, B 60 C / 30 F T3C 56800, C D E F G 00 C / F T C / 75 F T C / 30 F T3C 56800, C / 356 F T3A C / F T C / 75 F T C / 30 F T3C 56800, C / 356 F T3A C / F T C / 75 F T C / 39 F T3B 65300* 00 C / F T C / 75 F T C / 30 F T3C 56800, C / 39 F T3B C / 39 F T3B C / F T C / 75 F T C / 30 F T3C 56800, C / 39 F T3B C / 39 F T3B NOTE: Group E available in select models only. Consult Factory. *Series 65, (New Design Close Coupled) and 65, (Fan Guard Mount) are Class I Group C and D, Class II Group F and G only Maximum exterior surface temperature is based on operation in an ambient of 0 F (0 C). 65,300 and 87,300 & 8,300 Circuit Diagram These brakes rely on a thermostat switch wired to the motor control circuit to limit the brake s enclosure surface temperature. Refer to the circuit diagram. If the brake begins to overheat, the thermostat TSW switch will open and interrupt the motor starter and brake solenoid current, causing the brake to set. A second thermostat TSW will close on Series 65,00, or will open on Series 87,300** and 8,300** brakes. The TSW switch can be used to actuate alarm or warning light. This switch actuates at a lower temperature than TSW, and will alert the equipment operator of an impending thermal overload. **TSW is optional on 87,300 and 8,300 series brakes. 8

29 Series 65,300 ( , -07 & -09) Division I Hazardous Location Mounting Face: NEMA 56C, 3TC and TC.5 AK, 5.88 AJ Hazardous-location brakes are intended essentially for non-cyclic or holding purposes, but may be used for stopping light inertial loads. Unit Pricing (Discount Symbol B0) Series Close Coupled Hazardous location NEMA 7, 9 Model Number Nominal Static (lb-ft) (Nm).5 () 3 () 6 (8) 0 () (0) Dimensions in Inches (mm) SL Max. SL Min (7.93) (57.).95.5 (7.93) (57.).95.3 (7.93) (58.67).95.3 (7.93) (58.67).95 (7.93).3 (58.67) Close Coupled Hazardous location NEMA 7, 9 Model Number Enclosure Static (lb-ft) List Price $,330.00,.00,590.00,795.00,9.00 Weight lbs (kg) 38 (7.) 38 (7.) 0 (8.) 5 (0.) 5 (0.) Weight lbs (kg) IP 56.5 $, (3.6) IP 56 3 $3, (3.6) IP 56 6 $3, (5.8) IP 56 0 $3, (5.8) IP 56 $3, (5.8) Static :.5 through lb-ft Enclosure Material: Cast Iron Release Type: Knob, maintained with automatic reset Adjustable Visual Wear Indicator Manual Wear Adjustment Epoxy Encapsulated Coil Construction, with Class H Insulation NO & NC Thermostat Spring-Set Electrically Released Lead Wire Length: 36 inches Maximum Speed: Horizontal 00 rpm, Vertical 3600 rpm No modification required for vertical mounting Ordering and Identification Information Example of a complete part number: BFB Lead wire position (external left) 30 Vac 5/8 bore and 3/6 x 3/3 keyway Series : (Current Design = 05) (New Fan Guard Mount = 09) Standard Voltage Ratings Character Hub Selection Voltage Hz Character (in.) (in. x in.) Bore Keyway** B 60 D 0 E F H 0 L M N O 0/0 P / Q 08-30/60 90/ R 00/00 60 A* B C D K maximum allowable bore 5/8 5/8 3/ 7/8 / /8 x /6 3/6 x 3/3 3/6 x 3/3 3/6 x 3/3 /8 x /6.0 in. (.0 mm) * These bores are non-standard. Add $35.00 to list price. ** Keyseats made to ANSI B7. standard Modifications are availablesee SAB Modification Section Engineering Specifications Nominal Static (lb-ft) (Nm) No. of Friction Discs Coil Size Maximum Solenoid Cycle Rate cycles/min.5 () 0 Thermal Capacity hp-sec/min (watts) (5) Inertia (Wk ) lb-ft (kgm x 0 - ).008 (3.36) Character B C Lead Wire Position Form Form 3 3 () 0 (5).008 (3.36) 6 (8) K 0 0 () K 0 (0) K+ 0 (5) (5) (5).008 (3.36).0 (5.58).0 (5.58) Maximum solenoid cycle rate is 0 cycles/min., based on ambient temperature of 7 F ( C) with % duty cycle. Does not relate to brake cycle rate (see Thermal Capacity). Thermal capacity rating is hp-sec/min. (5 watts) based on ambient temperature of 7 F ( C), stop time of one second or less, with no heat absorbed from motor. Derate thermal capacity by 5% for vertical mounting. Refer to Selection Procedure Section. Current Ratings (amperes) Solenoid Coil Size Current Inrush 3.6 Holding.3 K Inrush.3 Holding.3 K+ Inrush.6 Holding. Voltage: 60 Hz Voltage: Hz

30 Series 65,300 Continued Series Mounting Requirements: Series Hazardous Location Motor Mounted Brake is used for mounting close coupled (directly) to the motor end bell. If the brake is to be mounted to a motor fan guard, or if a motor frame adapter is incorporated, it is recommended that Series be used, as it provides additional bearing support for the longer shaft that is required. The acceptability of the brake and motor combination must be determined by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Certified: Series 65, ( ) USL/CNL, File E-893, for Class I, Group C and D and Class II, Group E, F and G Class I, Zone, Group IIA and IIB Enclosure Protection: Type /IP 0 and Hazardous Location NEMA 7, 9 Installation and Service Instructions: P/N Rev. C & D brakes Parts List: P/N Rev. C & D brakes Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes request certified prints Series Mounting Requirements: Series Hazardous Location Motor Mounted Brake is used for mounting close coupled (directly) to the motor end bell. If the brake is to be mounted to a motor fan guard, or if a motor frame adapter is incorporated, it is recommended that Series be used, as it provides additional bearing support for the longer shaft that is required. The acceptability of the brake and motor combination must be determined by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Certified: Series 65, ( ) USL/CNL Listed, File E-893, for Class I, Group C and D and Class II, Group F and G Class I, Zone, Group IIA and IIB Enclosure Protection: Type /IP 56, and Hazardous Location NEMA 7, 9, UL Type Installation and Service Instructions: P/N Parts List: P/N Note: 65,300 Series Close-Coupled Brakes (-07) must be mounted directly to motor endbell. 30

31 Series 65,300 Continued Fan-Guard Mount IP 3 Hazardous location NEMA 7, 9 Model Number Static lb-ft (Nm).5 () $, Weight lbs (kg) 5 (3.6) (), (3.6) (8) 3, (5.8) () 3, (5.8) (0) 3, (5.8) Series Mounting Requirements: Series Hazardous Location Motor Mounted Brake is recommended for mounting to a motor fan guard or for use with a motor frame adapter. The acceptability of the brake and motor combination must be determined by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Enclosure Protection: Type /IP 0 and Hazardous Location NEMA 7, 9 Certified: 65, ( ) USL/CNL File E-893, for Class I, Group C and D and Class II, Group F and G Class I, Zone, Group IIA and IIB Installation and Service Instructions: P/N Parts List: P/N Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes request certified prints. **Maximum keyway length for Fan Guard Mount ( ) 3

32 Series 87, and 87,300-0 (-087-3) Motor Mounted Division I Hazardous Location Mounting Face: NEMA 8TC, 8TC, 3TC, TC, 5TC, 56TC 8.5 AK, 7.5 AJ Static : 0 through 05 lb-ft Enclosure Material: Cast Iron Release Type: Knob Modification required for vertical above mounting. For vertical below, modification required on -05 lb-ft. See SAB Modification Section for list price adders. Series 87, Hazardous-location brakes are intended essentially for non-cyclic or holding purposes, but may be used for stopping light inertial loads. Self-Adjusting Design Epoxy Encapsulated Coil Construction, with Class H Insulation NC Thermostat Spring-Set Electrically Released Lead Wire Length: 36 inches Maximum Speed: Horizontal 000 rpm, Vertical 3000 rpm ABS Type Approval Certified. Brake set and release times in milliseconds, when brake and motor are switched separately (for T/T definitions, see page 0): Static Coil Size T T 0,, 5, 5 & , 75, Enclosure Protection: Type /IP 0, Type /IP 55, or Type /IP 57 protection, the brake must be mounted close coupled to the motor end bell (a motor frame adapter may be included). Hazardous Location NEMA 7, 9. Mounting Requirements: Series Hazardous Location Motor Mounted Brake is recommended for mounting close coupled (directly) to the motor end bell. If the brake is to be mounted to a motor fan guard, or if a motor frame adapter is incorporated, it is recommended that Series be used, as it provides additional bearing support for the longer shaft that is required. The acceptability of the brake and motor combination must be determined by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Certified: UL Listed, File E-893 for Class I, Group C and D and Class II, Group F and G. CSA Certified, File LR-958 for Class I, Group C and D, and Class II, Group F and G. Installation and Service Instructions: P/N Parts List: P/N for IP for IP 55 Outline Drawing for IP 0 & 55 Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes request certified prints. Dimensional Data/Unit Pricing (Discount Symbol D) 3 Model Number Enclosure IP 0 IP 55 IP 0 IP 55 IP 0 IP 55 IP 0 IP 55 IP 0 IP 55 IP 0 IP 55 IP 0 IP 55 Nominal Static (lbft) (Nm) 0 () (0) 5 (3) 35 (7) (68) 75 (0) 05 () $3,3.00,.00 3,0.00, ,75.00,55.00,000.00,800.00, ,0.00 5, ,0.00 7,3.00 8,.00 A 9.3 (37.33) 9.3 (37.33) 9.3 (37.33) 9.3 (37.33) 9.3 (37.33) 9.3 (37.33) 0.3 (6.73) Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) AE 3. (8.79) 3. (8.79) 3. (8.79) 3. (8.79) 3. (8.79) 3. (8.79). (07.9) AG.5 (57.).5 (57.).5 (57.).5 (57.).5 (57.).5 (57.).75 (69.9) C.76 (70.).76 (70.).76 (70.).76 (70.).76 (70.).76 (70.) 3.73 (9.7) SL ± (65.0).56 (65.0).56 (65.0).56 (65.0).56 (65.0).56 (65.0) 3.53 (89.7) Weight lbs (kg) 6 (8.0) 63 (8.6) 63 (8.6) 63 (8.6) 6 (9.0) 65 (9.5) 7 (3.7)

33 Series 87, Enclosure Protection: IP 57 Certified: UL Listed, File E-893 for Class I, Group C and D and Class II, Group E, F and G. Dimensional Data / Unit Pricing (Discount Symbol D) Model Number Enclosure Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) A C SL AE G Wt. Lbs (kg)** IP 57 0 () $6, (8.6) IP 57 (0) $6, (9) IP 57 5 (3) $7, (9) IP (7) $7, (9) IP 57 (68) $8, (9.5) IP (0) $9, (30) IP () $0, (33.) 33

34 Series 87, and 87,300-0 Continued (-087-3) Motor Mounted Division I Hazardous Location Series 87,300-0 Enclosure Protection: Type /IP 0, Type /IP 55, or Type /IP 56. Hazardous Location NEMA 7, 9. Installation and Service Instructions: P/N Parts List: P/N Mounting Requirements: Series Hazardous Location Motor Mounted Brake is recommended for mounting to a motor fan guard, or for use with a motor frame adapter. The acceptability of the brake and motor combination must be determined by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Certified: UL Listed, File E-893 Series 87,300-0, Class I Group C and D and Class II, Group E, F and G. CSA Certified, File LR-958, Class I, Group C and D, and Class II, Group E, F and G. Outline Drawing for IP 0 & 55 Hazardous-location brakes are intended essentially for non-cyclic or holding purposes, but may be used for stopping light inertial loads. Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes request certified prints. * max diameter.65 in./ min..875 in. **L is the maximum keyway slot. Dimensional Data/Unit Pricing (Discount Symbol D) Model Number Enclosure Nominal Static (lb-ft) (Nm) Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) A AE C SL ± (88.90) L** Max..89 (73.0) List Price IP 0 IP 55 0 () 0.3 (6.60). (07.9) 3.65 (9.70) $5, IP IP 55 (0) (6.60) (07.9) (9.70) (88.90) (73.0) 5, IP IP 55 (3) (6.60) (07.9) (9.70) (88.90) (73.0) 5, IP IP 55 (7) (6.60) (07.9) (9.70) (88.90) (73.0) 5, IP IP 55 (68) (6.60) (07.9) (9.70) (88.90) (73.0) 6, IP IP 55 (0) (6.60) (07.9) (9.70) (88.90) (73.0) 7, IP IP 55 () (75.0) (9.0) (0.0) (95.30) (79.70) 9, Weight lbs (kg) $, (), (), (), () 5, () 6, () 8, (3.5) Side release is also available in a fan guard mount design. Consult Stearns and request drawing no D 3

35 Series 87,300-0 Enclosure Protection: IP 56 Dimensional Data / Unit Pricing (Discount Symbol D) Model Number Enclosure Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) A C **L SL AE Wt. Lbs (kg)** IP 56 0 () $7, (.3) IP 56 (0) $7, (.3) IP 56 5 (3) $8, (.3) IP (7) $8, (.3) IP 56 (68) $9, (.3) IP (0) $0, (.3) IP () $, () 35

36 Series 87, (-087-3) Division I Hazardous Location Mounting: Foot Mounted Static : 0 through 05 lb-ft Enclosure Material: Cast Iron Release Type: Knob Enclosure Protection: Type /IP 0, Type /IP 55 and Hazardous Location NEMA 7 and NEMA 9 Installation and Service Instructions: P/N Parts List: P/N Mounting Requirements: Series Hazardous Location Foot Mounted Brake does not require assembly to the motor to complete the hazardous location enclosure. Hazardous-location brakes are intended essentially for non-cyclic or holding purposes, but may be used for stopping light inertial loads. Self-Adjusting Design Epoxy Encapsulated Coil Construction, with Class H Insulation NC Thermostat Spring-Set Electrically Released Lead Wire Length: 36 inches Maximum Speed: Horizontal 000 rpm Certified: UL Listed (IP 0 models only), File E-893 for Class I, Group C and D and Class II, Group F and G. CSA Certified (IP 0 and IP 55 models), File LR-958 for Class I, Group C and D, and Class II, Group F and G. ABS Type Approval Certified Brake set and release times in milliseconds, when brake and motor are switched separately (for T/T definitions, see page 0): Static Coil Size T T 0,, 5, 5 & , 75, Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes request certified prints. * * Keyseats made to ANSI B7. standard 36 Dimensional Data/Unit Pricing (Discount Symbol D) Model Number Enclosure Nominal Static (lb-ft) (Nm) List Price IP 0 IP 55 0 () $,.00 $5, IP 0 $, IP 55 (0) $5,00.00 (37.7) IP 0 5 $, IP 55 (3) $5,65.00 (37.7) IP 0 35 $5, IP 55 (7) $5, (37.7) IP 0 $5, IP 55 (68) $6, (37.7) IP 0 75 $6, IP 55 (0) $7, (37.7) IP 0 05 $8, IP 55 () $9,.00 (397.67) Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) A AF 5.85 (37.7) (8.59) 5.85 (8.59) 5.85 (8.59) 5.85 (8.59) 5.85 (8.59) 5.85 (8.59) 6.85 (73.99) Weight (lbs) (kg) 8 (37.) 83 (37.6) 83 (37.6) 83 (37.6) 8 (38.) 85 (38.5) 9 (.7)

37 Series 87,300 continued Specifications and Ordering Information for Series 87, ( ) and Series 87,300-0 ( ) Engineering Specifications Nominal Static (lb-ft) (Nm) 0 () (0) No. of Friction Discs Coil Size Maximum Solenoid Cycle Rate cycles/min Thermal Capacity hp-sec./min (watts) (87) (87) Inertia (Wk ) lb-ft (kgm x 0 - ).056 (3.68).056 (3.68) Current Ratings (amperes) Voltage: 60 Hz Coil Size Current V Inrush Holding Inrush Holding Inrush Holding V V V V V Voltage: Hz 0 V V V (3) 35 (7) (68) 75 (0) 05 () (87) (87) (87) (87) (87).056 (3.68).056 (3.68).089 (37.56).089 (37.56).7 (53.6) Motor Frame Adapters WARNING! Before selecting an adapter to mount a brake on a larger motor frame, the torque and thermal capacity required by the application should be determined as shown in the Selection Procedure section. A larger motor may indicate a requirement for greater thermal capacity than the brake is designed for. The brake selection must be matched to the motor and application requirements, before use of an adapter is considered. Consult the factory. Maximum solenoid cycle rate is based on ambient temperature of 7 F ( C) with % duty cycle. Does not relate to brake cycle rate (see Thermal Capacity). Thermal capacity rating is based on ambient temperature of 0 F (0 C), stop time of one second or less, with no heat absorbed from motor. Derate thermal capacity by 5% for vertical mounting. Refer to Selection Procedure Section. Ordering and Identification Information The following example and tables provide information for selecting the appropriate three-letter suffix when ordering a Stearns Brake. Example of a complete part number: ELC Lead wire position (external right) 60 Vac -/8 bore and / x /8 keyway (does not apply to foot mounted brake) Series -0 Hub Selection Character Bore (in.) D E F G H 7/8 -/8 -/ -3/8-5/8 Keyway* (in. x in.) 3/6 x 3/3 / x /8 / x /8 5/6x 5/3 3/8 x 3/6 maximum allowable.65 in. bore * Keyseats made to ANSI B7. standard Standard Voltage Ratings Character Voltage Hz B 60 D 0 E F H 0 L M N O 0/0 P /30 60 Q 30/60 90/ R 00/00 60 Character B C Lead Wire Position Form Form 3 Modifications are available-see SAB Modification Section 37

38 Series 8,300 (-08-3) Motor Mounted Division I Hazardous Location Mounting Face: NEMA 3 and 36 TC, TSC, NEMA 36 and 365 TC,TSC, NEMA 0 and 05 TC, TSC..5 AK,.0 AJ Static : through 330 lb-ft Enclosure Material: Cast Iron Release Type: Side lever Enclosure Protection: Type /IP 0, Type /IP 56 Hazardous location NEMA 7 and NEMA 9 Modification required for vertical mounting. Unit Pricing (Discount Symbol D) Series Close Coupled Hazardous location NEMA 7, 9 Model Number Series Fan Guard Mount Hazardous location NEMA 7, 9 Model Number Enclosure Enclosure Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) List Price IP 56 (69) $, IP (37) 3, IP (3), IP (7) 5, Also, see page 5 for Mining Brakes - MSHA Certified series Series Foot Mounted Hazardous location NEMA 7, 9 List Price IP 0 $7, IP 56 (69) 8, IP , IP 56 (37) 9, IP , IP 56 (3) 0, IP , IP 56 (7), Hazardous-location brakes are intended essentially for noncyclic or holding purposes, but may be used for stopping light inertial loads. Cast Iron Enclosure, Including new IP 56 & new Fan Guard Mount Self-Adjusting Design Epoxy Encapsulated Coil Construction, with Class H Insulation NC Thermostat Spring-Set Electrically Released Lead Wire Length: 36 inches Maximum Speed: 3600 RPM Horizontal 00 RPM Vertical Certified: UL Listed, File E-893, CSA File LR-958 for Class I, Group C and D, and Class II, Group E and F, and G. ABS Type Approval Certified Ordering and Identification Information Example of a complete part number : FNB Lead wire position (external left) 575 Vac Standard Voltage Ratings Character Voltage Hz B 60 D 0 E F H 0 L M N O 0/0 P /30 60 Q 30/60 90/ R 00/ /8 bore and 3/8 x 3/6 keyway Series : (Motor mount = 00) (New Fan Guard Mount = 0) Hub Selection Character Bore (in.) A C D F H J L N * maximum allowable bore -/8-3/8 -/ -5/8-3/ -7/8 -/8 Keyway** (in. x in.) / x /8 5/6 x 5/3 3/8 x 3/6 3/8 x 3/6 3/8 x 3/6 / x / / x / / x /. in. ( mm) *These bores are non-standard. Add $ to list price. **Keyseats made to ANSI B7. standard. Model Number Enclosure Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) List Price IP 56 (69) $, IP (37) 5, IP (3) 6, IP (7) 7, Character B C Lead Wire Position Form Form 3 38 Motor Frame Adapters Adapters are available for mounting to 8TC-56TC, 8-86TC, and -5TSC motor frames. See Series 8,000 for details. Engineering Specifications Nominal Static (lb-ft) (Nm) No. of Friction Discs Coil Size Maximum Solenoid Cycle Rate cycles/min Thermal Capacity hp-sec/min (watts) Inertia (Wk ) lb-ft (kgm x 0 - ) (69) 9 0 ().8 (95.76) 75 (37) 9 0 ().8 (95.76) 30 (3) ().37 (33.) 330 (7) 3 K9 3 0 ().37 (33.) Maximum solenoid cycle rate is based on ambient temperature of 7 F ( C) with % duty cycle. Does not relate to brake cycle rate (see Thermal Capacity). Thermal capacity rating is based on ambient temperature of 7 F ( C), stop time of one second or less, with no heat absorbed from motor. Refer to Selection Procedure Section. Current Ratings (amperes) 8,300 Motor Mounted and Foot Mounted Voltage: 60 Hz Coil Size Current V 00 V 30 V 00 V 60 V 575 V 9 K9 Modifications are available- see SAB Modification Section Inrush Holding Voltage: Hz Current 0 V 0 V 380 V Inrush Holding..6. Voltage: 60 Hz Current V 00 V 30 V 00 V 60 V 575 V Inrush Holding Voltage: Hz Current 0 V 0 V 380 V Inrush Holding

39 Series 8,300 Continued Series Motor Mounted Brake Mounting Requirements: Series Hazardous Location Motor Mounted Brake is used for mounting close coupled (directly) to the motor end bell. If brake is to be mounted to a motor fan guard, or if a motor frame adapter is incorporated, please contact the factory for information on Series , as it provides additional bearing support for the longer shaft that is required. The acceptability of the brake and motor combination must be determined by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Enclosure Protection: Type /IP 0, Type /IP 56, and Hazardous Location NEMA 7, 9 Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes request certified prints. Model Number C SL lb-ft lb-ft (70.87) (76.96) lb-ft lb-ft (83.57) (89.66) Above drawing is for motor mounted brake only. For fan guard mounted brake ( series), request Stearns drawing no D Series Foot Mounted Brake Mounting Requirements: Series Hazardous Location Foot Mounted Brake does not require assembly to the motor to complete the hazardous location enclosure. Enclosure Protection: Type /IP 56 and Hazardous Location NEMA 7, 9 Hazardous-location brakes are intended essentially for non-cyclic or holding purposes, but may be used for stopping light inertial loads. Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes, request certified prints. *Keyseats made to ANSI B7. standard 39

40 Series 56,800 (-056-8) Division Hazardous Location Mounting Face: NEMA 56C, 3TC and TC.5 AK, 5.88 AJ Static :.5 through 5 lb-ft Enclosure Material: Cast Iron Release Type: Side Lever, maintained with auto reset Enclosure Protection: Type /IP 56 Certified: UL Listed, File E 893 for Class I, Division, Groups A, B, C, D, and Class II, Division, Groups F and G Mounting Requirements: Series Hazardous Location Motor Mounted Brake is recommended for mounting close coupled to the motor end bell. The acceptability of the brake and motor combination must be determined by Underwriters Laboratory. Universal Mounting: Through lb-ft. 0 and 5 lb-ft. supplied with springs for vertical modification. Epoxy Encapsulated Coil Construction, with Class H Insulation NC Thermostat Maximum speed: Horizontal 00 rpm Vertical 3600 rpm Installation, Service and Parts List: P/N ABS Type Approval Certified Brake set and release times in milliseconds, when brake and motor are switched separately (for T/T definitions, see page 0): Static Coil Size T T, K, K+, M+ Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes request certified prints. Motor Frame Adapters WARNING! Before selecting an adapter to mount a brake on a larger motor frame, the torque and thermal capacity required by the application should be determined as shown in the Selection Procedure section. A larger motor may indicate a requirement for greater thermal capacity than the brake is designed for. The brake selection must be matched to the motor and application requirements, before use of an adapter is considered. To Adapt to NEMA Frame Size 8TC 8TC 3TC TC 5TC 56TC AK Dim. in. (mm) 8. (.90) 8. (.90) Reg. No. 0-5 For adapter dimensions, see Technical Data Brake.5-6 Adapter Stock Number List $ List $700 Additional Shaft Length Required in. (mm).9 (3.8).9 (3.8) Unit Pricing (Discount Symbol B) Model Number Nominal Static (lb-ft) (Nm) 3 () 6 (8) 0 () (0) 0 (7) 5 (3) Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) A AG C G.7 (9.).7 (9.).7 (9.).7 (9.).7 (9.).7 (9.).59 (.0).59 (.0).59 (.0).59 (.0).59 (.0).59 (.0).8 (30.0).8 (30.0).8 (30.0).8 (30.0).8 (30.0).8 (30.0).66 (.).66 (.).66 (.).66 (.).66 (.).66 (.) Enclosure List Price Wt. lbs (kg) IP 56,5.00 IP 56,6.00 IP 56, IP 56, IP 56, IP 56,

41 Series 56,800 continued Engineering Specifications Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm).5 () 3 () 6 (8) 0 () (0) 0 (7) 5 (3) No. of Friction Discs Coil Size Maximum Solenoid Cycle Rate cycle/min K 7.5 K K M+ 7.5 Thermal Capacity Inertia (Wk ) hp-sec/min (watts) lb-ft (kgm x 0 - ) Horizontal 3.5 (3.) 3.5 (3.) 3.5 (3.) 3.5 (3.) 3.5 (3.) 3.5 (3.) 3.5 (3.).008 (3.36).0 (5.88).0 (5.88).0 (5.88).0 (5.88).00 (8.0).00 (8.0) Maximum solenoid cycle rate is based on ambient temperature of 0 F (0 C) with % duty cycle. Does relate to brake cycle rate (see Thermal Capacity). Thermal capacity rating is based on ambient temperature of 0 F (0 C), stop time of one second or less, with no heat absorbed from motor. Derate thermal capacity by 5% for vertical mounting. Refer to Selection Procedure Section. Current Ratings (amperes) Solenoid Coil Size K K+ M+ Current Vac Inrush 3.6 Holding.3 Inrush.3 Holding.3 Inrush.6 Holding. Inrush Holding Voltage: 60 Hz Vac Vac Vac Vac Vac Voltage: Hz 0 Vac Vac Vac Ordering and Identification Information The following example and tables provide information for selecting the appropriate three-letter suffix when ordering a Stearns Brake. Example of a complete part number: BFF Lead wire position (internal and external, left and right) 30 Vac 5/8 bore and 3/6 x 3/3 keyway Hub Selection Bore Character (in.) A* B C D E F* K L* N* O* P* R* S* 5/8 5/8 3/ 7/8 -/8 -/ / 9/6 /6 -/6 3/6 /6 Keyway** (in. x in.) /8 x /6 3/6 x 3/3 3/6 x 3/3 3/6 x 3/3 / x /8 / x /8 /8 x /6 / x /8 /8 x /6 3/6 x 3/3 / x /8 3/6 x 3/3 / x /8 Maximum allowable bore.5. For thru-shaft applications,.875 is maximum. *These bores are non-standard. Add $5.00 to list price. **Keyseats made to ANSI B7. standard. Standard Voltage Ratings Character Voltage Hz B 60 D 0 E F H 0 L M N O 0/0 P Q 30/ /380 R 00/00 60 voltages not available. Space heater not available. Modifications are available- see SAB Modification Section

42 Series 87,800 (-087-8) Division Hazardous Location Mounting Face: NEMA 8TC 8TC, 3TC, TC, 5TC, 5UC, 56TC and 56UC 8.5 AK, 7.5 AJ Static : 6 through 05 lb-ft Enclosure Material: Cast Iron Release Type: Knob Enclosure Protection: Type /IP 56 Division Hazardous Duty Certified: UL Listed, File E-893. For Hazardous Location Classification, see Dimensional Data below. Mounting Requirements: Series Hazardous Location Motor Mounted Brake is recommended for mounting close coupled to the motor end bell. The acceptability of the brake and motor combination must be determined by Underwriters Laboratory. Modification required for vertical above mounting. For vertical below, modification required on -05 lb-ft. Epoxy Encapsulated Coil Construction, with Class H Insulation NC Thermostat Maximum speed: Horizontal 000 rpm Vertical 3000 rpm ABS Type Approval Certified Installation, Service & Parts List: P/N Brake set and release times, when brake and motor are switched separately (for T/T definitions, see page 0): Static Coil Size T T 0,, 5, 5 & , 75, Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes request certified prints. Dimensional Data/Unit Pricing Model Numbers Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) 6 (8) 6 (8) 0 () 0 () (0) (0) 5 (3) 5 (3) 35 (7) 35 (7) (68) (68) 75 (0) 75 (0) 05 () 05 () Hazardous Location Classification Division Class I Group - A, B, C, D A, B, C, D A, B, C, D A, B, C, D A, B, C, D A, B, C, D A, B, C, D A, B, C, D Class II Group - A Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) AE AG F, G IP 56 $,75.00 (9.0) (5.97) (9.8) (5.) (9.) B F, G IP 56 $,75.00 (9.0) (5.97) (9.8) (5.) (9.) B F, G IP 56,75.00 (9.0) (5.97) (9.8) (5.) (9.) B F, G IP 56,75.00 (9.0) (5.97) (9.8) (5.) (9.) B F, G IP 56,35.00 (9.0) (5.97) (9.8) (5.) (9.5) B F, G IP 56,35.00 (9.0) (5.97) (9.8) (5.) (9.5) B F, G IP 56,00.00 (9.0) (5.97) (9.8) (5.) (9.5) B3 F, G IP 56,00.00 (9.0) (5.97) (9.8) (5.) (9.5) B3 F, G IP 56,5.00 (9.0) (5.97) (9.8) (5.) (0.9) B3 F, G IP 56,5.00 (9.0) (5.97) (9.8) (5.) (0.9) B3 F, G IP 56,8.00 (0.7) (58.67) (.6) (38.0) (9.) B3 F, G IP 56,8.00 (0.7) (58.67) (.6) (38.0) (9.) B3 F, G IP 56 3,3.00 (0.7) (58.67) (.6) (38.0) (.7) B3 F, G IP 56 3,3.00 (0.7) (58.67) (.6) (38.0) (.7) B3 F, G IP 56,0.00 (7.) (7.37) (.6) (.80) (.7) B3 F, G IP 56,0.00 (7.) (7.37) (.6) (.80) (.7) B3 C Enclosure List Price Wt. lbs (kg) Discount Symbol

43 Series 87,800 continued Motor Frame Adapters: WARNING! Before selecting an adapter to mount a brake on a larger motor frame, the torque and thermal capacity required by the application should be determined as shown in the Selection Procedure section. A larger motor may indicate a requirement for greater thermal capacity than the brake is designed for. The brake selection must be matched to the motor and application requirements, before use of an adapter is considered. To Adapt to NEMA Frame Size 56C, 3TC or TC Current Ratings (amperes) Coil Size Current 5 6 inrush holding inrush holding AK Dim. in. (mm). (.30) Voltage: 60 Hz Voltage: Hz Reg. No Adapter Stock Number Brake endplate is modified for. in. AK. An adapter is not furnished. Add: $ TC or TC (66.70) 3TC, 36TC, 36TC, TC, (37.) 0TC or 05TC For adapter dimensions, see Technical Data Additional Shaft Length Required in. (mm) ( ).56 (.).8 (0.6).88 (.) Ordering and Identification Information The following example and tables provide information for selecting the appropriate three-letter suffix when ordering a Stearns Brake. Example of a complete part number: ELF Lead wire position (internal and external, left and right) 60 Vac -/8 bore and / x /8 keyway Hub Selection Character A* B* C* D E F G H I* K* L* M* N* O* P* Q* R* S* T* U* Z Bore (in.) 5/8 5/8 3/ 7/8 -/8 -/ -3/8-5/8-3/ / -/ 9/6 /6 -/6-7/6 3/6 /6-3/6-5/6.600 Keyway** (in. x in.) /8 x /6 3/6 x 3/3 3/6 x 3/3 3/6 x 3/3 / x /8 / x /8 5/6 x 5/3 3/8 x 3/6 3/8 x 3/6 /8 x /6 / x /8 3/8 x 3/6 /8 x /6 3/6 x 3/3 / x /8 3/8 x 3/6 3/6 x 3/3 / x /8 / x /8 5/6 x 5/3 pilot bore Maximum allowable bore.65. *These bores are non-standard. Add $.00 to list price. ** Keyseats made to ANSI B7. standard. 8 inrush holding Engineering Specifications Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) 6 (8) 0 () (0) 5 (3) 35 (7) (68) 75 (0) 05 () 7.6. No. of Friction Discs Coil Size Maximum Solenoid Cycle Rate cycles/ min Thermal Capacity Inertia (Wk ) hp-sec/min (watts) lb-ft. (kgm x 0 - ).08 (7) (0.3).08 (7) (0.3).08 (7) (0.3).08 (7) (0.3).08 (7) (0.3).089 (7) (37.0).089 (7) (37.0).9 (7) (5.5) Maximum solenoid cycle rate is based on ambient temperature of 0 F (0 C) with % duty cycle. Does relate to brake cycle rate (see Thermal Capacity). Thermal capacity rating is based on ambient temperature of 0 (0 C), stop time of ne second or less, with no heat absorbed from motor. Derate thermal capacity by 5% for vertical mounting. Refer to Selection Procedure Section...3 Standard Voltage Ratings Character Voltage Hz B 60 D 0 E F H 0 L M N O 0/0 P /30 60 Q 30/ R 00/00 60 Modifications are available- see SAB Modification Section Optional Space Heater for Class II Brakes only 3

44 Series 56,700 (-056-7) Die Cast Aluminum (-056-7S) Stainless Steel Mounting Face: NEMA 56C, 3TC and TC.5 AK, 5.88 AJ Static :.5 through 5 lb-ft Enclosure Material: IP 3, 5 & 55 Die Cast Aluminum; IP 56 Stainless Steel Release Type: Knob, Maintained with automatic reset Enclosure Protection: IP 3 & 5 (formerly referred to by Stearns as NEMA Type & respectively). IP 55 & 56 (formerly referred to by Stearns as NEMA Type BISSC Certified & Type stainless steel enclosure, respectively). ABS Type Approval Certified Spring-Set Electrically Released Adjustable Manual Release Knob, Maintained with Automatic Reset Manual Wear Adjustment Maximum Speed: 00 rpm Horizontal 3600 rpm Vertical Note: 56,700 Series mounts between C-Face motor and reducer. Do not apply overhung load to brake output shaft. Installation and Service: P/N Parts List: P/N Modifications: Pages 5-63 Universal Mounting: Through lb-ft. 0 and 5 lb-ft. supplied with springs for vertical modification. Brake set and release times in milliseconds, when brake and motor are switched separately (for T/T definitions, see page 0) Static lb-ft Coil Size T T ½ - 5, K, K+, M+ 5 3/8-6 mounting stud * For and U dimensions, see Ordering and Identification Information. Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes request certified prints. Dimensions /Unit Pricing (Discount Symbol E3) Nominal Static (lb-ft) (Nm).5 () 3 () 6 (8) 0 () Enclosure Type IP 3 IP 5 IP 55 IP 3 IP 5 IP 55 Basic Model Number and $80.00 $ $6.00 $9.00 $ $ $0.00 $ $ $ $70.00 $,00.00 IP S-0 $,7.00 IP 3 IP 5 IP $ $ $ $, $ $, IP S-0 $, IP 3 IP 5 IP $ $ $ $,05.00 $ $,80.00 IP S-0, Dimensions in Inches (mm) A J L.9 (.7).9 (.5).9 (.5).9 (.7).9 (.5).9 (.5).9 (.5).9 (.7).9 (.5).9 (.5).9 (.5).9 (.7).9 (.5).9 (.5).9 (.5) 3.8 (96.8) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 3.8 (96.8) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 3.8 (96.8) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 3.8 (96.8) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6).53 (38.9).53 (38.9).53 (38.9).53 (38.9).53 (38.9).53 (38.9).53 (38.9).53 (38.9).53 (38.9).53 (38.9).53 (38.9).53 (38.9).53 (38.9).53 (38.9).53 (38.9) Wt. lbs (kg) (5.) 3 (5.9) 3 (5.9) (5.) 3 (5.9) 3 (5.9) (0) (5.) 3 (5.9) 3 (5.9) (0) (5.) 3 (5.9) 3 (5.9) (0) Dimensions /Unit Pricing (Discount Symbol E3) Nominal Static (lb-ft) (Nm) (0) 0 (7) 5 (3) Enclosure Type IP 3 IP 5 IP 55 Basic Model Number and $ $, $ $,05.00 $ $,80.00 IP S-0, IP 3 IP 5 IP $ $,5.00 $ $,90.00 $, $, IP S-0,8.00 IP 3 IP 5 IP $9.00 $,.00 $, $, $,60.00 $,60.00 IP S-0,99.00 * in 9th digit designates hub bore and shaft size. Dimensions in Inches (mm) A J L.9 (.7).9 (.5).9 (.5).9 (.5) 5.36 (36.) 5.39 (36.9) 5.39 (36.9) 5.39 (36.9) 5.36 (36.) 5.39 (36.9) 5.39 (36.9) 5.39 (36.9) 3.8 (96.8) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 3.8 (96.8) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 3.8 (96.8) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6).53 (38.9).08 (7.).08 (7.).53 (38.9).08 (7.).08 (7.).08 (7.).08 (7.).08 (7.).08 (7.).08 (7.).08 (7.) Wt. lbs (kg) (5.) 3 (5.9) 3 (5.9) (0) (5.) (6.3) (6.3) (0) 3 (5.9) (6.3) (6.3) (0)

45 Series 56,700 Continued Engineering Specifications Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm).5 () 3 () 6 (8) 0 () (0) 0 (7) 5 (3) No. of Friction Discs Coil Size Maximum Solenoid Cycle Rate cycles/min K K K K K+ M K+ M M+ P Thermal Capacity Inertia (Wk ) hp-sec/min (watts) lb - ft Horizontal Vertical (kgm x 0 - ) () (80) (3.36) () (80) (3.36) () (80) (3.36) () (80) (5.88) () (80) (5.88) () (80) (8.0) () (80) (8.0) Maximum solenoid cycle rate is based on ambient temperature of 7 F ( C) with % duty cycle. Does not relate to brake cycle rate (see Thermal Capacity). Thermal capacity rating is based on ambient temperature of 7 F ( C), stop time of one second or less, with no heat absorbed from motor. Refer to Selection Procedure Section. Current Ratings (amperes) Solenoid Coil Size + K K+ M M+ P+ Voltage: 60 Hz Voltage: Hz Voltage: Current inrush holding inrush holding inrush holding inrush holding inrush holding inrush holding inrush holding _ _.. _ _.8. _ _..08 _ _.9.08 _ _.7.06 _ _..3 _ _.. _ Ordering and Identification Information The following example and tables provide information for selecting the appropriate three-letter suffix when ordering a Stearns Brake... _ _.0. _.9.08 _ _ _ _ _ _ Example of a complete part number: _ FF Lead wire position (internal and external, left and right) Series 30 Vac Does not apply Enclosure 5/8 hub bore and shaft Hub Bore, Shaft and Keyway Sizes 9th Digit of Model No. Bore Dia. () Keyway** Shaft Dia. (U) Keyway** x x * with sleeve to convert to.65.9 x.09.9 x.09 *One sleeve provided in each brake with sleeve to convert to.875 **Keyseats made to ANSI B7. standard..9 x.09.9 x.09 Standard Voltage Ratings Character Voltage Hz B 60 D 0 E F H 0 L M N O 0/0 P / Q /60 90/380 R 00/00 60 Direct Current Character T U V W Y Z Voltage Consult factory if other voltage is needed. Modifications are available- see SAB Modification Section 5

46 Series 87,700 (-087-7) Mounting Face: NEMA 8TC 8TC, 3TC, TC, 5TC, 5UC, 56TC and 56UC Double C-Face Coupler 8.5 AK, 7.5 AJ Static : 6 through 05 lb-ft Enclosure Material: Aluminum Housing, Cast Iron Endplate Release Type: Side Lever, Maintained with automatic reset Enclosure Protection: IP 3, 5 & 55 (formerly referred to by Stearns as NEMA, & BISSC Certified, respectively). Installation and Service Instructions: P/N Rev. B & C Parts List: P/N Rev. B P/N Rev. C Modifications: Pages 5-63 Note: 87,700 Series mounts between C-Face motor and reducer. Do not apply overhung load to brake output shaft. Modification required for vertical above mounting. For vertical below, modification required on -05 lb-ft. See SAB Modifications for list price adders. ABS Type Approval Certified Spring-Set Electrically Released Self-Adjusting Design Maximum Speed: Horizontal 000 rpm Vertical 3600 rpm Certified: CSA File LR-65 * For and U dimensions, see Ordering Information and Identification Information. Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes request certified prints. ** Hub location. () mounting holes equally spaced on a 7.5 (8.) B.C. Use /-3 x.5 mounting bolts. Dimensional Data/Unit Pricing (Discount Symbol E) Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) Enclosure Basic Model Number and * List Price* List Price* Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) A AE AG C Wt. lbs (kg)** 0 () IP $, $,95.00 IP , ,95.00 IP B 3, B 3, (.7). (53.93).9 (.83).8 (7.) 66 (30.0) (0) IP , ,95.00 IP , ,55.00 IP B 3, B 3, (.7). (53.93).9 (.83).8 (7.) 66 (30.0) 5 (3) IP , ,00.00 IP , ,60.00 IP B 3, B 3, (.7). (53.93).9 (.83).8 (7.) 66 (30.0) 35 (7) IP , ,70.00 IP , , IP B 3, B, (.7). (53.93).9 (.83).8 (7.) 66 (30.0) (68) IP , ,30.00 IP , ,90.00 IP B 3, B, (5.).6 (66.68). (.8) 3.3 (8.) 73 (33.0) 75 (0) IP , , IP , , IP B 3, B, (5.).6 (66.68). (.8) 3.3 (8.) 73 (33.0) 05 () IP , , IP , , IP B 3, B, (38.) 3. (79.38).00 (5.0) 3.8 (96.8) 80 (36.0) 6 * in 9th digit designates hub bore and shaft size.

47 Series 87,700 Specifications continued Specifications Nominal Static No. of Friction lb-ft Discs (Nm) 0 () (0) 5 (3) 35 (7) (68) 75 (0) 05 () Solenoid Size Maximum solenoid Cycle Rate cycles/ min Thermal Capacity Inertia (Wk ) hp-sec/min (watts) 7.5 (9) 7.5 (9) 7.5 (9) 7.5 (9) 7.5 (9) 7.5 (9) 7.5 (9) lb-ft (kgm x 0 - ).078 (3.76).078 (3.76).078 (3.76).078 (3.76).08 (5.36).08 (5.36). (60.90) Maximum solenoid cycle rate is based on ambient temperature of 7 F ( C) with % duty cycle. Does not relate to brake cycle rate (see Thermal Capacity). Thermal capacity rating is based on ambient temperature of 7 F ( C), stop time of one second or less, with no heat absorbed from motor. Derate thermal capacity by 5% for vertical mounting. Refer to Selection Procedure Section. Brake set and release times in milliseconds, when brake and motor are switched separately (for T/T definitions, see page 0): Static Coil Size T T 0,, 5, 5 & , 75, Current Ratings (amperes) Coil Size Current Voltage: 60 Hz Voltage: Hz Voltage: Inrush Holding Inrush Holding Inrush Holding Ordering and Identification Information The following example and tables provide information for selecting the appropriate three-letter suffix when ordering a Stearns Brake. Example of a complete part number: FG Lead wire position (external, left and right) 30 Vac Does not apply Hub bore and output shaft size. Hub Bore, Shaft and Keyway Sizes 9th Digit of Model Number 3 5 Bore Dia. ()..6 ( ) ( 3.95 ) (.75 ).300 Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) Shaft Dia. Keyway* Keyway* (U).5 x. (6.35 x 3.8).3 x.6 (7.9 x 3.97).38 x.9 (9.5 x.76).. ( ) ( ) (.75 ). For sizes other than those shown, contact factory. No motor frame adapters or foot mounting kit available. * Keyseats made to ANSI B7. standard..5 x. (6.35 x 3.8).3 x.6 (7.9 x 3.97).38 x.9 (9.5 x.76) Shaft Length (AH).6 (66.68) 3. (79.38) 3.75 (95.5) Standard Voltage Ratings Character Voltage Hz B 60 D 0 E F H 0 L M N O 0/0 P /30 60 Q 30/ R 00/00 60 Direct Current Character T U V W Y Z Voltage Consult factory if other voltage is needed Modifications are available- see SAB Modification Section 7

48 Series 56,703 ( ) Foot Mounted, Bearing-Supported Thru-Shaft Static :.5 through 5 lb-ft Enclosure Material: Die Cast Aluminum Enclosure Protection: IP 3 (formerly referred to by Stearns as NEMA ). Release Type: Side Release Knob Installation, Service and Parts List: P/N Specifications: Page Modifications: Pages 5-63 Maximum overhung or side load measured at one inch from end of shaft: 36 lbs Brake set and release times in milliseconds, when brake and motor are switched separately (for T/T definitions, see page 0): Static lb-ft ½ - 5 Coil Size, K, K +, M + T 5 Universal Mounting:.5 through lb-ft. 0 and 5 lb-ft supplied with springs for vertical modification. T Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes request certified prints. Dimensions Nominal Static Lb-Ft (Nm) () () (8) () (0) (7) (3) No. of Friction Discs B AH Pricing (Discount Symbol E3) Nominal Static Basic Model Number Lb-Ft (Nm).5 () $, $, () , , (8) , , () , , (0) , , (7) , , (3) , ,.00 Ordering and Identification Information Standard * Voltage Ratings Direct Current The following example and tables provide information for selecting the appropriate twoletter suffix when ordering this Stearns Brake. Example of a complete part number: QC Right hand leads 30/60 Vac Shaft diameter is 7/8 Example of a complete part number: QC Right hand leads 30/60 Vac Shaft diameter is -/ F H 0 L M N O 0/0 P / Q 08-30/60 90/ R 00/00 60 Character Voltage Hz B 60 D 0 E Character T U V W Y Z Voltage *Current ratings see page Character B C Lead Wire Position Form Form 3 8 Modifications are available- see SAB Modification Section

49 Series 87,00 (-087-) Foot Mounted, Bearing-Supported Thru-Shaft Static : 6 through 05 lb-ft. Enclosure Material: Cast Iron Endplate and Housing Release Type: Side Lever, maintained with automatic release. Enclosure Protection: IP 3 & 5 (formerly referred to by Stearns as NEMA &, respectively). Installation and Service Instructions: P/N Parts List: P/N Specifications: Page 7 Modifications: Pages 5-63 Self adjust - see SAB Modifications for new manual adjust. For vertical mounting modification see SAB Modification Section. Maximum overhung, or side load measured at one inch from end of shaft: 00 lbs on brake housing side, lbs on endplate/foot mount side Brake set and release times in milliseconds, when brake and motor are switched separately (for T/T definitions, see page 0): Static Coil Size T T 0,, 5, 5 & , 75, *Keyseats made to ANSI B7. standard. Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes request certified prints. Dimensional Data and Engineering Specifications/Unit Pricing (Discount Symbol A) Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) 0 () (0) 5 (3) 35 (7) (68) 75 (0) 05 () Enclosure Basic Model Number and * List Price List Price Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) A Z AF IP 3 IP $,75.00, $3, , (369.8) 9.3 (38.3) 9.38 (38.5) 3.56 (90.) IP , , (38.3) 3.56 IP , ,95.00 (369.8) 9.38 (38.5) (90.) IP , , (38.3) 3.56 IP , , (369.8) 9.38 (38.5) (90.) IP , , (38.3) 3.56 IP , ,50.00 (369.8) 9.38 (38.5) (90.) IP , , (9.9).06 IP , ,80.00 (38.) 9.88 (.95) (03.) IP , , (9.9).06 IP , ,30.00 (38.) 9.88 (.95) (03.) IP , , (6.3).56 IP , ,00.00 (395.0) 0.38 (63.65) (.8) Thermal Capacity (hp-sec/ min) Inertia Wk (lb-ft ) Wt. lbs (kg)** 7 (33.0) 7 (33.0) 73 (33.0) 73 (33.0) 78 (35.0) 78 (35.0) 8 (37.0) *See Ordering Information, previous page. 9

50 Marine, Maritime & Navy Brakes Solenoid-Actuated Brakes To download complete brochure, click here Marine Marine Maritime Navy Description Suitable for many shipboard and severe duty applications Suitable for many shipboard and severe duty applications Suitable for many Coast Guard, shipboard and severe duty applications when ductile iron is specified Designed to Military Specification Compliance (Note A) IEEE 5 ABS IEEE 5 ABS IEEE 5 Federal Standard 6 ABS MIL-B-639C (Ships) Spring Set Operation (Note E) Armature Actuated Brake (AAB) Stearns Series (Note B) K xx-K0-08-0xx-K xx-K0 Solenoid Actuated Brake (SAB) -087-Mxx -08-xx -086-xx xx -08-6xx xx Enclosure IP 56 IP 56 IP 56 (Note C) IP 5, IP 56 IP 5 IP 56 Enclosure Finish Coil Endplate or Mount Plate Material DI - Water Based Primer Alum - anodize MIL-A-855 F Encapsulated Construction Class H Insulation Water Based Primer Injection Molded Construction Class B Insulation Alkyd Primer MIL TT-P-65C Injection Molded Construction Class B Insulation Enamel MIL-E-90 Encapsulated Class H Steel Cast Iron Ductile Iron Ductile Iron Housing Material Cast Aluminum or Ductile Iron Cast Iron Ductile Iron Ductile Iron Support Plate Material N/A Steel (Note H) Ductile Iron Ductile Iron Pressure Plate & Stationary Disc Material N/A Brass Brass Brass A. IEEE 5 compliance nameplate is optional. ABS Certificate SB370 B. Additional options and modifications are included in the full digit part number C. IP 56 with side release option available in K0 & K0 D. The maintained release holds the brake in a release condition until the brake is electrically, or manually, re-engaged The non-maintained ( deadman ) release is manually held in the the released condition, re-setting when the force is removed E. Spring-set, Solenoid with coil & linkage actuated brake (SAB), or voltage coil Spring-set, Armature actuated direct-acting brake (AAB), voltage coil F. Carrier ring friction disc is standard with the 3 & 360 series and is an option in the SAB brakes G. Stainless Steel Self-Adjust is standard with the -08x-600 and -087-M00 H. -087: cast aluminum; -08: cast iron; -086: ductile iron Armature-Actuated Brakes MIL-B-639C is inactive for new design and is no longer required, except for replacement purposes, per statement issued by Naval Sea Systems Command in June of 00. The armature-actuated brake (AAB) was designed in consultation with Naval specification authorities as a suitable Commercial off the shelf (COTS) motor brake. Series 3 Series 360 Pressure Plate Mount Internal Maintained Manual Release (lb-ft) Self Adjusting (Note G) Manual Release (Note D) Model Number No. Gap By Gage NEMA Frame Size H0 8TC-56TSC $, H0 8TC-56TSC $, J0 8TC-86TSC $, K0 3TC-05TSC $, J0 8TC-86TSC $, K0 3TC-05TSC $5, k0 3TC-05TSC $6, No, Gap By Scale Yes Yes Yes Optional Maintained Maintained Non-Maintained Magnet Body Mount Internal Maintained/ Optional External Non-Maintained Manual Release (lb-ft) Model Number NEMA Frame Size H0 8TC-56TSC $3, J0 8TC-86TSC $3, H0 8TC-56TSC $, H0 8TC-56TSC $, J0 8TC-86TSC $, J0 8TC-86TSC $, K0 3TC-05TSC $5, K0 3TC-05TSC $6, L0 TC $6,9.00

51 Mining Brakes - MSHA Certified Stearns series of electric fail-safe motor brakes are now certified for use in underground mines by the federal Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA). Stearns is the only supplier of MSHA certified motor brakes. MSHA approves and certifies products for use in underground coal and gassy mines to ensure that they do not cause a fire or explosion. Features: Fan Guard Mounted Mounting face:.5 AK,.0 AJ (NEMA 3 and 36 TC, NEMA 36 and 365 TC, NEMA 0 and 05 TC) Static : through 330 lb-ft Spring-Set Electrically-Released Enclosure Material: Cast Iron Manual Release Type: Side lever, latching with automatic reset when electric power is applied to the brake coil Enclosure Protection: IP 56 Self-Adjust Design: Automatic adjustment for friction disc wear - to reduce maintenance Class H Coil Insulation Thermal Cut-Out Switch Electrical Connections terminate at terminal block MSHA Certification Number: 8-PA Options: Internal Encoder Internal Electric Heater Electrical Release Indicator Switch Carrier Ring Friction Discs Model No. IP56 No. of Discs Lb-Ft C **L SL Unit Pricing (Discount Symbol D) Ordering Information - specify : Model No. Enclosure Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) IP56 (69) $6, IP56 75 (37) $7, IP56 30 (3) $9, IP (7) $30,000 Model Number Bore & keyway Voltage Options Leadwire packing gland - left or right (looking towards brake mounting face). Note: encoder option requires that the encoder wiring enters the brake from the opposite side of all of the other brake wiring. These brakes need to be purchased from the motor manufacturer, as the required shaft length (dimension SL above) is not standard. Refer to Stearns Catalog page 37 5

52 Encoder Brakes Stearns Solenoid Actuated Brakes with Internally Mounted Encoder HS0 Encoder (Shown) Series Brake (shown) Features Available in frame sizes 8TC - 5TC All enclosure ratings available, including hazardous location Separate conduit exits are provided for the brake and encoder leads, to minimize potential electrical interference Choice of popular encoder manufacturers Benefits Encoder located in protected environment - enclosed inside the brake housing Simplified encoder mounting - using a hub or shaft-mount encoder - and it s already done! Reduced package length - an internal encoder does not add any length to the brake Lower installed cost Ordering Information Stearns brakes with internal encoders are purchased through the motor manufacturer, as the required shaft length and diameter are non-standard. An internal encoder is not a retrofit option, like a brake coil, heater or switch. To order the brake motor package, specify the brake model and encoder option from table on following page. 5

53 Encoder Brakes (Con t) Stearns Solenoid Actuated Brakes with Internally Mounted Encoder Ordering Information For Stearns Solenoid Actuated Brakes (SABs), with internal encoders - Industrial Locations Frame Size Brake Series Range (lb-ft) Dynapar HS0 8TC - 56TC -087-E 5-05 BEI HS0 BEI HS5 Dynapar HS0 3TC - 05TC BEI HS0 BEI HS5 Dynapar HS0 3TC - 05TC BEI HS0 BEI HS5 TC - 5TC Encoder Connector / Options Cable Dynapar HS0 BEI HS0 BEI HS5 BEI HS35M M, 8 Pin / M, 8 Pin / 5m 0 Pin / 0 M, 8 Pin / M, 8 Pin / 5m 0 Pin / 0 M, 8 Pin / M, 8 Pin / 5m 0 Pin / 0 M, 8 Pin / M, 8 Pin / 5m 0 Pin / 0 0 Pin MS / Adder 3 (requires special motor shaft) $,05 6 $,05 6 $,95 6 $,0 7 $,0 7 $,970 7 $,0 7 $,0 7 $,970 7 $,0 7 $,0 7 $,970 7 $6,00 7 Adder (for standard motor shaft) $,95 $,95 $5, $3,0 $5,0 $5,890 $3,0 $5,0 $5,890 $3,0 $5,0 $5,890 $7,00 Stearns Drawing No E00ED 087E00ED 0800ED 0800ED 0800ED 0800ED 08600ED 08600ED 08600ED 08600E35D Division Hazardous Location 8 8TC - 56TC Dynapar HS0 BEI HS0 Dynapar HS0 3TC - 05TC BEI HS0 BEI HS5 Encoders are Optical, 0 PPR. M, 8 Pin / M, 8 Pin / 5m M, 8 Pin / M, 8 Pin / 5m 0 Pin / 0 $, D $3, D $6, D $8, D $8,795 0 Cables are shielded. Lengths are from encoder connector, inside the brake (not from outside of brake housing) 3 Brake must be supplied by the motor manufacturer (a longer stepped-down (5/8 diameter) motor shaft is required). A special/longer brake hub is supplied (with 5/8 diameter extension for encoder) 5 Request this drawing for shaft design requirements 6 List adder to List adder to IP5 brake models 8 No motor shaft modifications required, beyond the brake requirements for a standard hazardous location brake. 9 List adder to or List adder to 083 Drawing D brake model mounts close-coupled to the motor end bell. For the brake model that mounts to the motor fan guard, refer to drawing D. For the brake model that mounts to the motor fan guard - with a slinger - refer to drawing D. Drawing 0830D brake model mounts close-coupled to the motor end bell. For the brake model that mounts to the motor fan guard, refer to drawing 0830D. In addition to the fully enclosed brake with internal encoder options, encoders can be adapted externally to Stearns brakes: Motor shaft mounted encoder tethered to the brake housing. Motor shaft mounted encoder bolted to the brake housing. Encoder mounts to the stepped shaft of a double C-face brake (TC-56TC frame.) In-line coupling style encoder (8TC-56TC frame). 53

54 Information Needed for Modifications Stearns is dedicated to providing you with the most comprehensive selection of modified spring-set disc brakes on the market today. We have included a list of our more popular modifications complete with descriptions, pictures and graphics when applicable and list price adders along with their representative series. Note that modification list prices are subject to the same discounts as apply to the complete brake assembly. Below please find examples of how the modifications are called out with a letter in the 8th position of the digit model number. Note that these listings are not complete, but represent our more popular selections. For any special applications and modification requirements not found here, please contact your Stearns representative. IMPORTANT The modification letter will appear in the 8th position to call out the modification. Examples: th position th position 8th position See specific tables for some of the available options of the series required. If two or more letter modifications are required, the 8th position of the part number will remain zero and position 0, and will be assigned by Stearns as a special part number. All Series Modification Vertical Mounting - Above Motor Class H Insulation Space Heater ( Volt Circuit) Space Heater ( Volt Circuit), Brass Pressure Plate and Stationary Disc Brass Pressure Plate and Stationary Disc Vertical Mounting - Below Motor Thru-Shaft Housing (Standard) Vertical Mounting - Above Motor and Class H Insulation Electrical Release Indicator Switch, N.O. contacts Side Manual Release with Shaft Through Housing Stamped Steel Series 87,00 Only Vertical Mounting - Above Motor, Brass Pressure Plate and Stationary Disc Series 8,00, 8,00 87,000 and 87,00 Side Manual Release Letter A H I J K L Q T W Z N Y Solenoid Actuated Brakes Modification Index Category Coils Corrosion Resistance Endplates Friction Discs Gaskets Hubs/ Brake Shaft Machining Options Manual Adjust Manual Release Mounting Nameplates Paint/ Special Finish or Material Special Housing Switches Tach Mounting Derating Wiring Options Description Description Modification Number (M ) Page Class H Insulation M6 56 Coil Option M9 57 Non-Standard Voltage M5 60 Non-Standard Voltage M9 57 Special Leadwire Length M3 6 Brass Pressure Plate M3 55 Brass Stationary Disc M 55 Breather Drain M5 56 Space Heater ( or 30 volt) M3 57 Special Paint M 58 Stainless Steel Self-Adjust M 58 Stainless Steel Hardware M6 58 Corrosion-Resistant Endplate M39 6 Stainless Steel Hub M 6 Special Internal Leadwire Hole M35 6 Corrosion-Resistant Endplate M39 6 Special Milling: Flat Bottom on Housing & Endplate M0 6 Special Material Friction Disc M 63 Carrier Ring Disc (Steel or Zinc Aluminum) M6 63 Carrier Ring Disc (Bronze) M7 63 Motor Gasket M38 6 Viton Gasket M3 63 Non-Standard Bore or Keyway M 57 Special Shaft - Coupler Brakes M9 60 Taper-Lock Hubs M30 6 Stainless Steel Hub M 6 Splined Hub and Friction Disc M5 63 Encoder/Tach Machining M7 56 Metric Machining M33 6 Special Milling: Flat Bottom on Housing & Endplate M0 6 Manual Adjust for 87,000 Series M8 63 Side Manual Release M 57 Non-Maintained (Deadman) M3 6 Internal Release M37 6 Vertical M, M3, M Metric Machining M33 6 Motor Frame Adapters 97 Foot Mounting Kits 98 Mylar or Metal M0 57 Brass Nameplate M 6 Brass Pressure Plate M3 55 Brass Stationary Disc M 55 Special Paint M 58 Stainless Self-Adjust M 58 Stainless Steel Hardware M6 58 Corrosion-Resistant Endplate M39 6 Stainless Steel Hub M 6 Thru-Shaft NEMA M9 59 Thru-Shaft NEMA and M0 59 Split Housing M36 6 Electrical Release Indicator M 55 Electrical Release Indicator Proximity Switch M 55 Thermal Switch M8 58 Wear Indicator M7 60 Tach Machining M7 56 Thru-Shaft NEMA M9 59 Thru-Shaft NEMA and M0 59 Brass Pressure Plate M3 55 Brass Stationary Disc M 55 Special Derating of M3 6 Conduit Box with Terminal Strip M8 56 Terminal Strip M7 58 Special Length Leadwires M3 6 Internal Leadwire Hole M35 6 BK TO TABLE OF CONTENTS 5

55 M Electrical Release Indicator Switch This switch is used to indicate when the brake is in a released, non-holding position. This mechanism utilizes a mechanical limit switch. BK TO MODIFICATION INDE Series 56,00 & 65,300 8,000; 8,000; 87,00 86,00 Adder $ ,000 Series 87,000 Series (also representative of 8,000; 8,000 and 86,000 Series) Not available on 56,800 or 87,800 Series Brakes. M Electrical Release Indicator Proximity Switch Same function as the switch in M above; except, M uses an electronic proximity sensor. Series 8,000 8,000 87,00 86,00 Adder $ Not available on 56,800 or 87,800 Series Brakes. M3 Brass Pressure Plate Typically used in marine applications or in applications where the potential for sparks need to be eliminated. Brass can also be used to reduce torque. Series 56,00 65,00 8,000; 8,000 86,00 87,00* Adder See M $ *(N/A for lb-ft brake) M Brass Stationary Discs Used with brass pressure plate (List per disc). Series Adder 56,00 $.00 65, ,00*.00 8,000; 8, , *(N/A for lb-ft brake) 55

56 M5 Breather Drain A drain plug is tapped into the bottom of the housing to let moisture escape. This option is only available on brakes with cast aluminum or cast iron housings. Series Adder 56,00 $ , ,000 8,000 86,00 86,00 87,00 BK TO MODIFICATION INDE M6 Class H Insulation Brake is provided with an epoxy encapsulated coil, rated for NEMA Class H designation. These Class H coils are standard on hazardous location brakes. Series Adder 56,00 $.00 87, ,000 8, , M7 Housing Machining for Encoder/Tach Mounting Series Standard Machining Close Tolerance Tether Mount 3 Bolt Circle & Register Bolt Circle - but no Register Bolt Circle & Register A Single Bolt Hole Open Enclosure Adder Enclosed 5 Adder Open Enclosure Adder Enclosed 5 Adder Open Enclosure Adder Enclosed 5 Adder Standard Machining: The housing is machined for a thru shaft, and to allow for an encoder or tach to be mounted. This option is only available on brakes with cast aluminum or cast iron housings. Consult factory for availability. Close tolerance: The housing and endplate are assembled and dowel pinned together - then machined as a matched set for a through shaft and encoder mounting. This option is only available on brakes with cast aluminum or cast iron housings. This option is recommended for Series 8,000; 8,000; and 86,00 due to the long distance between the motor and encoder. 3 Tether Mount: The housing is machined for a through shaft, and a single tapped hole for a bolt to secure a tether arm. (56, has a through hole and tach-welded nut on inside of housing, instead of a tapped hole). Maximum Thru-Shaft Dia. (inch) Open Enclosure Adder Enclosed 5 Adder 56,00 (except N/A for 56,800) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A $3 $60 87,000-87,00 $700 $,00 $80 $3 $, $,7.63 $0 $3 87,M00-87,0-87,600 N/A $,00 N/A $3 N/A $,7 N/A $3 8,000-8,000 6 $,00 $,375 $305 $580 $,5 $,85.5 $65 $70 86,000 $,00 $,375 $380 $780 $,5 $,9 $50 $90 Referred to on the product pages in the catalog as IP3 5 Referred to on the product pages as IP5/55 (these enclosure ratings no longer apply when the housing is machined for this modification - the customer is responsible for meeting any specific enclosure rating when assembling the encoder. 6 M7 Modification for Series 8,000 and 8,000 will also require the M Modification; the side manual release. M8 Conduit Box with Terminal Strip A terminal strip is located inside the conduit box. It allows for easy connection and identification of lead wires. Series All series except hazardous location (not available for the 8,00 series) All hazardous location brakes Adder $ (IP 3) $ (IP 5) $

57 M9 Coil Option BK TO MODIFICATION INDE For voltage applications. Operates with an electronic switch module. Series Adder Additional Adder for Non-Standard Voltage 56,00 $ $.00 87, , , , For standard voltage listing, see the ordering information section for the specific brake. Not available on Hazardous Location Brakes. M0 Nameplates To order new brake nameplates, the serial number of the brake is required. A loose nameplate shipped from Stearns Division without being attached to a brake must have all agency markings removed (UL, CSA, etc.). In order to have a brake renameplated with the appropriate agency markings, it must be returned to Stearns Division for product verification. : Net Price: First Nameplate Additional Mylar Nameplates Additional Metal Nameplates $ M Nonstandard Hub or Keyway For standard bore diameter and keyway specifications, see specific brake selection page. For taper bores, consult factory for pricing. Description All Quantities and Enclosures 8,00 $ , Adder 8,000 65,00 8,000 86, ,000 87,00 87, , M Side Manual Release Side release not available on the or the Sheet Metal Housing (IP 3 Only) Adder 56,000; 56,00; 56,0 $.00 87,000; 87,00 $.00 Cast Iron Housing Adder M3 87,000 IP 3 $ includes casti iron housing adder of $0 87,000 IP 5 $ ,000 8,000 $3.00 Space Heater ( or 30 Volt Only) A space heater cartridge is used to prevent moisture build-up inside the brake housing. Series Wattage Adder 56,00* $0.00 8,000; 8,000; 86,00 and ,00** 5 to Hazardous Duty Brakes 5 to 7.00 *Not available on 56,800 or 87,800 Series Brakes **Not available in 87,800 Class I 56,000 Series 87,000 Series (also representative of 8,000; 8,000 & 86,000 Series) 57

58 M Special Paint BK TO MODIFICATION INDE The standard paint for all brake series (except BISSC Certified & Maritime/Navy) is a red, water-base primer, painted inside and out. For additional corrosion protection, a special (green) zinc chromate primer can be provided (painted inside and out) in place of the standard red primer. List price adders as shown. Series 56,00 65,00 Adder $ Other Special Paint options are available - either primers, a white epoxy finish coat, or clean finish (exterior primer removed). Consult factory for pricing. 8,000; 8,000; 86, , BISSC Certified paint (white epoxy exterior paint) is standard for brake series with IP55 and IP57 enclosure ratings - and the prices are included in the standard list prices. Maritime and Navy brakes have their own specified paints, with pricing included in the standard list prices. M Stainless Steel Self-Adjust Mechanism For severe duty applications. This option includes a stainless steel pinion and plated wrap spring in the auto-adjust mechanism. It is only available on the 8,000; 8,000; 86,000 and 87,000 Series Brakes Series 8,000; 8,000; 87,00* 86,00 List Price Adder $3.00 $ self-adjust mechanism *Stainless steel self-adjust is standard on series 87,600 M6 Stainless Steel Hardware All external hardware is provided in stainless steel. M7 Terminal Strip A terminal strip is located in the inside of the brake, on the support plate. It allows for easy connection and identification of lead wires. Series 8,00 56,00, 87,00 8,000, 8,000 86,000 Adder $.00 $.00 $75.00 Series ALL Adder $.00 56,000 Series 87,000 Series (also representative of 8,000; 8,000 & 86,000 Series) M8 Thermostat (thermal switch) 58 This switch is used to indicate when a brake is overheating. Thermostats are standard in 8,300 and 65,00 Series. This option is for NON-UL brakes only. Series 87,00 Switch Operation Specificatons Normally Closed: Opens at 95 F, Closes at 55 F 8,000, 8,000 Normally Closed: 86,00 Opens at 0 F, Closes at 80 F 56,00 Normally Closed: Opens at 95 F, Closes at 75 F Adder $

59 M9 Through-Shaft Enclosure This configuration allows for the motor shaft to extend beyond the housing of the brake. This modification lowers the brake enclosure rating to IP0. M0 Through-Shaft Cast Iron Enclosure with Lip Seal This configuration allows the motor shaft to extend beyond the housing of the brake with a bushing to use with a housing lip seal. This modification lowers the brake enclosure rating to IP0. Series 56,000, 56,00 56,00, 56,00 56,600 8,000, 8,000 86,000 87,000, 87,00 sheet metal 87,000, 87,00 with cast iron housing N/C $ N/C* 5.00 (adder for cast iron housing is $0.00 additional) *Up to -5/6. Above -5/6, add $ Series 56,00, 56,00 56,600 8,000, 8,000 86,000 87,000, 87,00 BK TO MODIFICATION INDE Adder Adder $ M Vertical Mounting for 56,000 Series & 65,300 Series The 56,000 0 and 5 lb-ft Series Brakes are shipped with spring kits. Vertical modification at from horizontal. Read installation and service instructions for details on its use. Description Factory assembly for three disc configuration. Adder $0.00 Example of 56,000 Series spring requirements for vertical above and below mounting. M3 Vertical Mounting for 87,00 Series For factory modification to vertical above or below application. Vertical modification at from horizontal. Series 87,000 & 87,00 Value (lb-ft) 6, 0,, 5 & 35 IP 3 & IP 5 steel hsg Above $95.00 IP 3 & IP 5 steel hsg Below no mod req d IP 5/55 cast iron Above $370.00* IP 5/55 cast iron Below no mod req d & 75 $05.00 $05.00 $380.00* $ $35.00 $35.00 $0.00* $35.00 *Includes adder for side manual release Series 87,300; 87,800; 87,700 Value (lb-ft) Vertical Above Vertical Below 6, 0,, 5 & 35 $95.00 no mod req d & 75 $05.00 $ $35.00 $35.00 Example of 87,000 Series spring requirements for vertical above mounting. 59

60 M Vertical Mounting for 8,000; 8,000 and 86,000 Series These brakes require factory modifications for vertical applications. Vertical modification at from horizontal. BK TO MODIFICATION INDE Series 8,000 & 8,00 8,000 & 8,00 8,00 8,00 86,000 IP 3 Above & Value (lb-ft) Below & & 7 $ *Includes adder for side manual release IP 5 Above $575.00* 6.00* 6.00* 8.00* 7.00* IP 5 Below $ Example of 8,000 Series pin, spring and spacer requirements for vertical above mounting. M5 Voltage Non-Standard () For standard voltage listing, see the ordering information section for the specific brake. Series 8,00 65,00 56,000 8,000; 8,00 86,00 87,00 Adder $ M7 Wear Indicator (Friction Disc) Switch A mechanical switch is installed to indicate when the friction disc requires replacement. Series Adder 8,000; 8,00 $ , ,00* 5.00 *Switch supplied with leads (Switches N/A on Series 87,800) 87,000 Assembly 87,000 Assembly M9 Special Shaft-Coupler Brake and Foot Mount Brake Any non-standard input or output shaft on a 56,700, 87,00 or 87,700 Series Brake. Series 56,700 87,00; 87,700 Adder $

61 M30 Taper-Lock Hubs BK TO MODIFICATION INDE For use in severe duty applications and reversing application to secure the brake hub to the motor shaft. Series 87,000; 87,00 IP 3 only 8,000 8,000 Series 0 to 35 lb-ft to 75 lb-ft 05 lb-ft & 75 lb-ft 30 lb-ft & 75 lb-ft 30 & 330 lb-ft 0 lb-ft Adder $ M3 Special Length Lead Wires Up to 5 Series All Adder $65.00 Over 5 Series All Adder $30.00 M3 The brake is mechanically released while the release is pulled into a release position. Once released, the brake sets. M33 Non-Maintained (Deadman) Manual Release Metric Machining Including Cast Iron Endplate Stearns SAB s can be used with metric motor frames. The following table indicates standard frame capabilities for an IEC B Face mount. Series 56,00; 56,00; 56,600 & 56,900 56,0 87,000 Series* Adder 56,00, 56,700, $ ,800 & 56,900 56,000, 56,00 & ,0 8,000; 8, & 87,000 86, *N/A on 56,300. Standard on 56,00 and 56,600. IEC Frame Sizes B flange in sizes 80; 90 & 00 B5 flange in sizes D63 & D7 B flange in sizes ; 3 & 60 B5 flange in sizes D7; D80; D90; D00 & D B flange in sizes ; 3 & 60 B5 flange in sizes D7; D80; D90; D00 & D Adder $30.00 $30.00 $30.00 M3 Derating of Stearns industrial SAB s can be custom built to meet your specific torque requirements. M35 Special Internal Lead Wire Hole with Bushing Any non-standard, internal lead wire hole in the endplate. Series Adder All brakes except hazardous location $75.00 brakes Series 56,0 87,00 8,000 & 8,000 Adder $ Derate To 6 lb-ft 0 or 30 lb-ft To be approved with application engineering 6

62 M36 Housing Split SAB s can be provided with a split housing. Series 8,000; 8,000 & 86,000 8,000; 8,000 & 86,000 gasketed 87,000; 87,00 sheet metal 87,000; 87,00 cast iron gasketed BK TO MODIFICATION INDE Adder $75.00 $, $00.00 $.00 M37 Internal Release An internal manual release requires that the housing be removed before the brake can be released by hand. *N/A for hazardous location brakes Series 87,0; 8,0; 8,0; 86,0 Adder N/C M38 Motor Gasket The brake is provided with an additional C-Face gasket to be placed between the brake and motor. Series* 8,000; 8,000; 86,000 Adder $ ,00 & 87, *N/A for hazardous location brakes M39 Corrosion-Resistant Endplate Rust preventative treatment applied to brake endplate. Series 56,00, 56,00, 56,0, 56,800 & 65,300 8,000; 8,00 & 86,000 87,00 Adder $ M0 Special Milling: Flat Bottom on Housing & Endplate This modification is provided in the event the flange between the endplate and housing interfere with the mounting configuration. Series 8,000; 8,000 & 86,000 Adder $6.00 M Brass Nameplate with Special Engraving Brass nameplates offer greater durability in outdoor applications. Series 8,000; 8,000 & 86,000 Adder $75.00 M Stainless Splined Hub Stainless steel splined hubs are available for extreme outdoor applications, to prevent corrosion on the disc and hub interface. Series 8,000; 8,000 & 86,000 87,000 Adder $

63 M3 Viton Gasket Gaskets and o-rings in brakes can be provided in Viton (flourocarbon) material, in place of the standard neoprene. However, the V-wiper steel-backed seals that are used on pull rod manual releases are not available in Viton and remain as neoprene. Viton is a registered trademark name of DuPont. Series Adder 8,000; 8,000; 86,000 $, ,000* $,.00 56,000 $9.00 BK TO MODIFICATION INDE *Viton gaskets and o-rings are standard for 87,00 series, except for hazardous location brakes where Viton seals are N/A. **Except series 56,00; 56,700; & 56,900 - where Viton gaskets are standard. M Special Friction Disc (per Disc) Any non-standard friction disc in a brake. Cost is per disc. Series Adder Non-standard discs include: hi-inertia friction discs and heavy duty friction discs. Does not include carrier ring friction discs (see M6 and M7). 87,000 56,000 $ M5 Splined Hub and Friction Disc Series Adder Series (lb-ft) Adder Standard on most models. Used for severe duty and reversing applications. 87,300 No Charge 87,00* 6-35 lb-ft & 75 lb-ft lb-ft * Spline is standard on this series. Adder is for pre-revision -tooth spline. M6 Carrier Ring Friction Disc The friction material is bonded to a steel or zinc/aluminum alloy ring. This is used for severe duty applications and applications where people are being moved. Series Horizontal Use Only Carrier ring material Adder (per disc) 8,000 Steel ,000 Steel Horizontal or Vertical Use 87,00** (not available on 87,300 or 87,800 series Zinc aluminum alloy 5.00 M7 Carrier Ring Friction Disc (Bronze) The friction material is bonded to a bronze ring. This is used for severe duty applications and applications where people are being moved. Horizontal applications only M8 ** Only available with pre-revision design, -tooth splined hub, which is included in this price,08,000 Series Manual Adjust Mechanism Excellent for holding applications when disc wear is not a concern. (Not available on hazardous location brakes.) Series Adder (per disc) 8,000 N/A 8,000 $ , ,00** 6-35 lb-ft & 75 lb-ft 05 lb-ft Series Adder 87,000 Subtract $ List 8,000 8,000 86,000 No Charge M60 Encoders Internally mounted encoders are available in some series brakes, including some hazardous location brakes. See pages 5-53 for series availability and additional information. Maximum Encoder Diameter (in.) -056 N/A -087-E &

64 Introduction to Armature Actuated Brakes (AAB) The Armature Actuated Brakes are spring-set, electrically released, friction devices, which develop holding and braking torque in the absence of electrical power. This type of brake can decelerate and hold a rotational load or can be ordered to provide a holding function only, where the motor is used as the dynamic brake. AAB s are available to meet a wide range of braking requirements. Available sizes range from 3 lb-in up to 300 lb-ft static torque, in a variety of mounting options. A short hub is available for face mounting or to provide for maximum space efficiency. Features include Class H magnet wire coils, corrosion resistance, and optional manual release lever. Custom designs and modifications are possible; consult the factory for more information. Operating Principle A hub which is attached to the shaft supports the rotatable friction disc. Brake torque is developed when springs apply a clamping force between the brake armature, friction disc and pressure plate. When electrical power is applied, the armature is pulled by the electromagnetic force in the magnet body assembly which overcomes spring action allowing the friction disc to rotate freely. When electrical power is interrupted, the electromagnetic force is removed and the pressure spring will mechanically force the armature plate to clamp the friction disc between itself and the pressure plate, thereby torque is developed. Engaged Condition (power off) Disengaged Condition (power on) Continued on next page 6

65 Product Overview Series 30 & 3 Pages Delivers high torque in a compact package for servo and stepper motor applications Sizes ranging from 8 to 00 lb-in, (.9 to 5. Nm) of torque Series 33 & 333 NEMA C-Face Adaptors for NEMA frame sizes 8C through 05TC/UC Enclosed version available in NEMA 8C through TC Pages 8-8 Series 30 Pages 7-7 Series 3 Pages Commercial duty, for small gear motors Pressure plate mounted, IP56 enclosure, ideal for Portal Crane applications. Sizes ranging from 3 to lb-in (.3 to 5.6 Nm) of torque sizes ranging from lb-ft (0-00 Nm). Series 3 Totally - Enclosed Non-ventilated (TENV) & Series 3 IP5 Enclosure Sizes from 3 to 7 lb-in (.3 to 8. Nm) of torque Pages Series 360 Magnet-body mounted brake in an IP-56 enclosure. Ideal for Portal Crane applications. sizes ranging from lb-ft (80-00 Nm). Pages Series 3 NEMA C TENV Pages Proving Switches and Rectifiers Pages Direct mounting to 8C and 56C motors Sizes from.5 to 5 lb-ft ( to 3 Nm) of torque For use with AAB Series 333, 3, and 360 Series 33 & 333 Pages 79-80, 8 Pages 9-96 High performance brake for metric/iec applications. Direct drop-in for Kebco, Lenze, and Binder. AAB Modifications Description, Availability, and Pricing Sizes ranging from 3 to 300 lb-ft, ( to 00 Nm) of torque 65

66 Armature Actuated Brakes (AAB) Selection Select the proper torque rating based on horsepower and rpm (speed at the clutch or brake) using the Selection Chart below. Based on. service factor. For other service factors and speeds, use the formulas shown below. Formula for TABLE Formula for TABLE 63, 05 P T = SF N T = Static torque, lb-in. P = Horsepower, hp N = Shaft speed at brake, rpm SF = Service Factor 63,05 = Constant 5,5 P T = SF N T = Static torque, lb-ft. P = Horsepower, hp N = Shaft speed at brake, rpm SF = Service Factor 5,5 = Constant Caution: Do not use Table to select brakes for overhauling or high inertial loads, or where a stop in specified time or distance is required. For these applications the total inertia of the load and power transmission system must be determined to make a brake selection. Refer to sections on torque and thermal ratings and determination. NOTE: Series 30 and 3 for holding applications only. TABLE Series 30, 3, 3 Static in lb-in. (Nm) Motor hp TABLE Series 333/3/360 Static in lb-ft. (Nm) rpm Static lb-in (Nm) /0 8 (.03) 7 (.79) 7 (.79) 7 (.79) 3 (.3) 3 (.3) 3 (.3) 3 (.3) 3 (.3) / 8 (.03) 8 (.03) 7 (.79) 7 (.79) 7 (.79) 7 (.79) 7 (.79) 3 (.3) 3 (.3) 3 (.3) /8 35 (3.95) 8 (.03) 8 (.03) 8 (.03) 8 (.03) 7 (.79) 7 (.79) 7 (.79) 7 (.79) 3 (.3) /6 35 (3.95) 35 (3.95) 8 (.03) 8 (.03) 8 (.03) 8 (.03) 8 (.03) 7 (.79) 7 (.79) 7 (.79) / 35 (3.95) 35 (3.95) 35 (3.95) 8 (.03) 8 (.03) 8 (.03) 8 (.03) 8 (.03) 7 (.79) /3 35 (3.95) 35 (3.95) 35 (3.95) 8 (.03) 8 (.03) 8 (.03) 8 (.03) 8 (.03) / 35 (3.95) 35 (3.95) 35 (3.95) 35 (3.95) 8 (.03) 8 (.03) 3/ 35 (3.95) 35 (3.95) 35 (3.95) 35 (3.95) 35 (3.95) 3 (.3) Motor hp (kw) rpm Static lb-ft (Nm) /3 (.5 ) 6 (8) 6 (8) 3 () 3 () 3 () 3 () 3 () 3 () 3 () 3 () / (.37) (6) 6 (8) 6 (8) 6 (8) 3 () 3 () 3 () 3 () 3 () 3 () 3/ (.55) (6) (6) 6 (8) 6 (8) 6 (8) 6 (8) 3 () 3 () 3 () 3 () (.75) 5 (3) (6) (6) (6) 6 (8) 6 (8) 6 (8) 6 (8) 6 (8) 3 () -/ (.) 5 (3) 5 (3) (6) (6) (6) (6) 6 (8) 6 (8) 6 (8) 6 (8) (.5) 5 (3) 5 (3) 5 (3) 5 (3) (6) (6) (6) 6 (8) 6 (8) 6 (8) 3 (.) 5 (60) 5 (60) 5 (3) 5 (3) 5 (3) 5 (3) (6) (6) (6) (6) 5 (3.7) 60 (80) 60 (80) 5 (60) 5 (60) 5 (3) 5 (3) 5 (3) 5 (3) 5 (3) (6) 7-/ (5.6) 0 () 0 () 60 (80) 60 (60) 5 (60) 5 (60) 5 (60) 5 (3) 5 (3) 5 (3) 0 (7.5) 80 (0) 0 () 0 () 0 () 60 (80) 5 (60) 5 (60) 5 (60) 5 (3) 5 (3) (.) 300 (00) 80 (0) 0 () 0 () 0 () 60 (80) 60 (80) 60 (80) 5 (60) 5 (60) 0 (.9) 300 (00) 80 (0) 80 (0) 80 (0) 0 () 0 () 0 () 60 (80) 60 (80) 60 (80) 5 (8.6) 30 (.) 0 (9.8) (37.3) 60 (.7) * Exceeds maximum speed rating. 300 (00) 300 (00) 80 (0) 300 (00) 300 (00) 80 (0) 300 (00) 300 (00) 80 (0) 80 (0) 300 (00) 300 (00) 300 (00) 0 () 80 (0) 80 (0) 300 (00) 300 (00) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 66

67 Series 30 Size.87 Size 5.0 Size.0 Size.5 Size.79 Size 3.35 : 0 to 3 lb-in (. to 39.5 Nm) UL Recognized Class H coil insulation system to US Standards (UR) and Canadian National Standards (CUR) - File E303 Spring activated and voltage released High torque, Compact size Corrosion resistant finishes Standard voltages and 90 Vdc and 30 Vac Available voltages, 36, 8 and 80 Vdc Low inertia rotating parts Splined hub for quiet dependable operation Holding applications only Installation and Service Instructions: P/N Option A, Long Hub Dimensional Data Size Model Number Mounting Screw Hub Location ØC D E Maximum Hub Lengths B K F G H Overall J L Mounting Screw thru Mag. Body # (M) #6 (M3) #8 (M) #0 (M5) / (M6) / (M6) Ø.60 (.656) Ø.770 (.958) Ø.0 (63.0) Ø.93 (73.990) Ø3.7 (95.) Ø.0 (.300) 5/6 (8mm) 5/6 (8mm) 5/8 (mm) 5/8 (mm) 7/8 (mm) /6 (mm).06 (0.3).06 (0.3).50 (3.).700 (7.78).700 (7.78).800 (0.3).560 (.).5 (0.80).65 (.88). (8.58).0 (38.0).7 (.5).9 (3.).06 (6.9).969 (.6).97 (0.55).3 (30.8).336 (33.93).387 (35.3).85 (30.0).35 (33.66).90 (30.3).0 (30.99).630 (.0).75 (.).905 (8.39).30 (33.53) (5.7) (37.3).375 (3.93).7 (36.75).93 (8.59).036 (5.7).87 (55.55).00 (.80).87 (7.89) 3.35 (85.09).5 (07.95) 5.00 (7.00).35 (9).85 (.5).7 (9).086 (7.6).085 (7.6).06 (7) 67

68 Series 30 Continued Engineering Specifications/Pricing (Discount Symbol R) Size Part Number Nominal Static Friction Approximate Weight Electric Power Hub and Disc Inertia lb-in Nm Material Type lbs kg (watts) lb-in-sec kg-cm-sec $ Holding E E $ Holding E E-05 $ Holding E-0.89E-0 $ Holding E-0.86E-0 $ Holding E E-0 $ Holding E E-03 $,0.00 Ordering Information Group 3 Armature Acting Brake =Standard 3= Reduced 3-0: For AAB-S Models AAB-S Unit Sizes Part Number H-JA Options TABLE 3 Voltages TABLE Hub bore and Keyseat TABLE Character Options Available by size 0 standard brake ALL H Quiet operation,.79,.0,.87, plastic carrier disc 3.35*,.5* *With carrier disc option, size 3.35 torque is lb-in holding, and size.5 torque is 00 lb-in holding Numeral or Letter Options Standard Unit Table : hub bores JA * * Keyway Size Character to insert 0D 0F 0H 0J 0L 0N 0O Bore +00/.00 / 5/6 3/8 / 5/8 3/ 7/8 Width inches /6 /6 3/3 /8 3/6 3/6 3/6 Depth inches /3 /3 3/6 /6 3/3 3/3 3/3.79 Bores Available (Size) Numeral Enclosure type 0 None Table : Coil Voltage H- Character to insert Voltage List Adder * A Current Rating in amps C * Vdc $ E Vdc G *8 Vdc J 90 Vdc L *80 Vdc N Vac P 30 Vac P /6 Metric / mm /8 mm *These voltages are non-standard. Add $0.00 for non-standard coil voltage Table 3: Options H-J * 08 8 Character Options Available by size A Basic Brake, Magnet Body.79,.0,.87, 3.35* Mounted, Long Hub.5*, 5.0*.8 *Sizes 3.35,.5 and 5.0 have a pass-through hub NOTE: Non-standard bore sizes available, contact factory. Add $60.00 for non-standard bore size. 68

69 Series 3 : 75 to 00 lb-in (8.5 to 5. Nm) UL Recognized Class H coil insulation system to US Standards (UR) and Canadian National Standards (CUR) - File E303 Spring activated and voltage released Corrosion resistant finishes Standard voltages and 90 Vdc Available voltages, 36, 8 and 80 Vdc Low inertia rotating parts Splined hub for quiet dependable operation Holding applications only Installation and Service Instructions: P/N Dimensions in Inches (mm) Size Model Number K N ØC Maximum.0 Qty. # (63.0) (80 ) apart UNC (85.75) 3. Qty. # (79.375) (90 ) apart UNF (0.6) (69.8) B A AK D Hub Lengths.00 (5.).56 (.7) E.73 (3.5).3 (59.690) Hub Location F.30 (7.60).6 (.06) G.999 (.775).30 (58.670) H.383 (9.78).93 (.5) J (85.85).7 (0.65) M.360 (9.).65 (.8).7 Qty. 6 / (0.6) (60 ) apart UNC (33.35) (88.900).60 (.75).3 (58.75).60 (.0).50 (6.56).656 (6.66) 5.00 (7.00).65 (.875) NOTE: Mounting bolt circles, mounting hole thread sizes, and quantity of mounting holes can be changed to meet your requirements. Please contact factory to request mounting dimensions other than those shown here 69

70 Series 3 Continued Engineering Specifications/Pricing (Discount Symbol R) Size Part Number Nominal Static lb-in Nm Friction Material Type Approximate Weight lbs kg Electric Power (watts) Hub and Disc Inertia lb-in-sec kg-cm-sec holding E E-0 $ holding E-03.7E-03, holding E-03.6E-03,36.00 Ordering Information Group 3 Armature Acting Brake 3-: For AAB-S Models AAB-S Unit Sizes Part Number Standard - Holding H-JA Options TABLE 3 Voltages TABLE Hub bore and Keyseat TABLE Modifications 0 = Standard model Numeral or Letter Options Standard Unit Table : hub bores JA * * Keyway Size* Character to insert 0B 0D Bore +00/.00 5/8 7/8 Metric Width inches 3/6 3/6 mm Depth inches 3/3 3/3 mm.8 Bores Available (Size) E -/8 / /8 0G -3/8 / /8 0M -/ / /8 Character to insert C E G J L Numeral Enclosure type 0 None Table : Coil Voltage H- Voltage * Vdc Vdc *8 Vdc 90 Vdc *80 Vdc * A List Adder $ *These voltages are non-standard. Add $0.00 for non-standard coil voltage Table 3: Options H-J * Character Options A Basic Brake, Endplate Mounted, Long Hub* 6.8 * Pass-through hub NOTE: Non-standard bore sizes available, contact factory. Add $60.00 for non-standard bore size. *Keyseats made to ANSI B7. standard. 70

71 Series 30 Armature Actuated Brakes Maintained manual release option (Shown with and without maintained manual release) rating 3 to lb-in / (.3 to 5.6 NM) UR and CUR Recognized insulation system, E-303 and sizes.8,.8 brakes with internal power supply File E-7 Class B temperature rise with Class H mag wire Available with two types of friction disc for holding (H) or dynamic (D) stopping applications Corrosion resistance Optional double D friction discs are available in 3-7 lb-in dynamic and 3- lb-in holding brakes. DD shafts fit the brake directly without a brake hub, no shaft keyway cost and simplify assembly Optional maintained manual release Optional mounting plates to make conversion over to the superior Stearns product easy Optional Rectifiers - internal or external in-line Optional band seal (not available for. size) Installation and Service Instructions: P/N Dimensional Data Size.D.H.8D.8H Model Number 3-0-0G 3-0-G 3-0-0G 3-0-G Qty. 3 Mounting Screw B Ø.0 #, #6 (M3) Ø.77 #6 (M3.5) Optional Manual Release Shown K Ø.55 (39.3) Ø. (53.975) Maximum Shaft Length (Manual Release Units) (7.6) (0.9) Hub Location F.685 (7.0).860 (.8).995 (5.7) F`.0 (.38).0 (.38) Brake Size..8 E**.0 (0.). (.3) G.890 (.60).065 (7.05).60 (3.00) A / / (7.05).0 (3.).05 (35.69) B H Long Hub.075 max..075 max. H3.5 (63.5) (95.885) Shaft Size 5/6 3/8 H5 C J.0.77 (0.6) (.96).55 (0.6).3 (6.7) D D Hub Lengths Long.38 (9.65).0 (0.) E.05 / /.3.6 /..376 /.37 Short.9 (.83).5 (6.35) A.95 (8.90).55 (6.77).0D.0H G 3-0-5G 3 Ø. #6 (M3) Ø.0 (56.388).30 (0.9).933 (3.70).0 (.38).530 (3.6).90 (30.3).63 (.) (95.885).55 (0.6). (63.5).69 (7.53).3 (7.87). (63.).8D.8H G 3-0-7G Ø.88 #8 (M) Ø.8 (7.738).90 (.5).95 (.3).0* (.7).0 (7.9). (35.9).36 (3.6).5 (95.885) *Size.8 can be pressure plate mounted using the long hub. The F` dimension shown for size.8 is for pressure plate mount using the long hub. ** No thru bore with manual release option..55 (0.6) 3.5 (8.55).0 (0.) * 3.3 (8.33) 7

72 Series 30 Continued Engineering Specifications/Pricing (Discount Symbol R) Size Part Number Nominal Static Friction Material Approx Weight Electric Power Hub and Disc Inertia Thermal Capacity Maximum Bore lb-in Nm Type lbs kg (watts) oz-in-sec HP-sec/min in mm Vdc Std Brake With manual Release Double D friction disc Options Adders Carrier ring friction disc Brake release indicator.d 3-0-0G Dynamic x 0-5 3/8 9 $80 $30 No charge $0 $80 N/A Consult Factory.H 3-0-G Holding x 0-5 3/ No charge Not available 80 N/A Band seal.8d 3-0-0G Dynamic x 0 - / No charge 0 80 $6.8H 3-0-G--.69 Holding x / No charge D G--.69 Dynamic x 0 - / 30 Not available Not available D G Dynamic x / Not available H 3-0-5G Holding x 0-3 / Not available D G Dynamic x / Not available H 3-0-7G Holding x 0-3 / 3 0 Not available Not available 80 For holding applications only. Set Screws located 0 from keyway. 7 Ordering Information Group 3 Armature Acting Brake. 30-0G-0H-JD AAB-R Unit Sizes Table : * * -JD Keyway Size* Characters to insert Bore Width (in.) x Depth (in.) 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 0G 0H 0J Character Size. Size.8 Size.0 Size.8 3/6 3/6 / / 5/6 5/6 3/8 3/8 / N/A /6 N/A /6 N/A /6 N/A 3/3 /8 mm mm mm mm 3 mm 3 mm N/A /3 N/A /3 N/A /3 N/A 3/6 /6 mm mm mm mm. mm. mm 30 = For AAB-R Models Nominal Static (lb-in) 3 Dynamic 5 Holding 7 Dynamic Dynamic 9 Dynamic Holding 8 Dynamic 30 Holding Dynamic 5 Holding 7 Dynamic 35 Dynamic Holding Part Number 5 7 Bores Available Mag Body Size. mm.8 mm mm.8 mm NOTE: For non-standard bores add $6.00. Set screws located 0 from keyway. Hubs are provided without keyway. *Keyseats made to ANSI B7. standard..8.0 List Adder $0.00 $ Characters A D* G* H Y Numeral Enclosure type 0 None Band seal Table A: J * * (Double D Bores) Bores Available Characters Bore to insert Mag Body Size..8H 0F 5/6 0H 3/8 NOTE: Can be used up to lb-in for holding. Table 3: Options H-J * Options Table 3 Voltages Table Hub bore and Keyway Table For Double D Bores See Table A Numeral or Letter Options Characters to insert A-Z Table : H- Standard Coil Voltage Options Standard Unit Reserved for Mounting Plates Basic Brake, Magnet Body Mounted, Long Hub Basic Brake, Pressure Plate Mounted, Short Hub* Short Hub, Pressure Plate Mounted with Maintained Manual Release* Long Hub with Maintained Manual Release, Size.8 Only Double D Friction Disc,.H,.D,.8H Option with Maintained Manual Release Pressure Plate Mounted *Short hub not required for size.8 pressure plate mount. E F G J S Character to Insert Voltage * Modification Brake release indicator (NC) Brake release indicator (NO) Standard - GGA Friction Material CCW manual release rotation Carrier ring friction disc List Adder* D Current Rating in Amps Size. Size.8 Size.0 Size.8 C Vdc E Vdc G 8 Vdc J 90 Vdc K 03 Vdc L 80 Vdc N Vac $ P 30 Vac $ Z /30 Vac $ /.0./.059.0/.075.0/.097 NOTE: Add $0.00 for non-standard coil voltage *For external in-line rectifier (for internal rectifier, add $30.00 list) NOTE: 65 o C maximum ambient temperature for all external in-line rectifiers NOTE: Final part number may change due to specifications or options selected or other product design considerations. A number such as a, 3, etc., in the th position is used to designate a unique brake (custom) and can only be assigned by Stearns Design Engineering Department. Modifications are available - see AAB Modification Section.

73 Series 3 & Series 3 Armature Actuated Brakes Shown: Size.8 with thru-shaft & manual release options Shown: Size.8 flange mount with manual release option Size. and.8 Totally Enclosed Non-Ventilated (TENV) Direct-Acting Brake - Quiet Operation Rating: 3 lb-in through 7 lb-in Enclosure Rating: 3 Series IP 3 Series IP5 UR and CUR recognized insulation system - File E-303; and sizes.8 &.8 brakes and 8C & 56C motor frame brakes with internal power supply File E-7 Class B temperature rise with Class H mag wire Pressure plate mount Installation and Service Instructions: P/N Optional: Optional double D friction discs are available in 3-7 lb-in dynamic and 3- lb-in holding brakes. DD shafts fit the brake directly without a brake hub, no shaft keyway cost and simplify assembly Optional: Maintained manual release lever, or non-maintained pull release Optional: Through-shaft Optional: Rectifiers - Internal, or external in-line (availability depends on size) Size.8 Manual release option Manual release option Dimensions in Inches (millimeters) Size Nominal Static Basic Model D Hub A H Lb-in Nm Number Series Mag Body Ø Location. Dynamic (.96).0 (.5) 3-- (.96) (7.65).05 (.7). Holding (3.05) 3.77 (.96).0 (.5) 3--5 (7.3) (7.65).05 (.7).8 Dynamic (.5) (.7).8 Holding (.5) 3--5 (3.98) (3.05) 3 (63.).05 (.7).8 Dynamic (.5) (.7).8 Dynamic (9.96) (3.8).8 Dynamic (9.96) (3.8).8 Holding (9.96) (3.8) Specifications Hub Length.9 (.83).5 (6.35).00 (.5).5 (6.35).00 (.5).5 (6.35).00 (.5).5 (6.35) Size Basic Nominal Static Approx. Weight Hub and Maximum Power Model Disc inertia Thermal Capacity Bore Size (watts) HP-sec/min Number Lb-in (Nm) lbs kg (Oz-in-sec ) in mm. Dynamic (.3) Holding (.56) x 0-3 Consult Factory 3/8 9.8 Dynamic (.79).8 Holding 3--5 (.69) x /** **.8 Dynamic 3--6 (.69).8 Dynamic (3.95) x 0-3 /.8 Dynamic (5.65) x /.8 Holding (8.) x 0-3 / **Set screws located 0 from keyway 73

74 Series 3 & Series 3 Continued SIZE. Inside Mount Brake released SIZE. Flange Mount 3 Series only Brake released SIZE.8 Inside Mount SIZE.8 Flange Mount NEW 7 mm bolt circle SIZE.8 Inside Mount SIZE.8 7mm Mount 7 *Also the location for the external leads for the 3 series is on the backside of the magnet body - not on the side (as shown in the above drawings) as with the 3 series.

75 Series 3 & Series 3 Continued Options THROUGH-SHAFT OPTION SIZE. &.8 Optional through-shaft - No manual release option SIZE.8 Optional through-shaft shown with manual release option (size.8 only) DOUBLE - D DISC OPTION Option Hubless option with flatted shaft double D friction disc Brake Size..8 A / /-.00 B.075 max..075 max. Shaft Size 5/6 3/8 C D E.05 / /.3.6 /..376 /.37 NOTE: Contact factory for Double D disc on brakes greater than 7 lb-in nominal static torque RECTIFIERS External In-line (as shown) or Internal Internal rectifier is available only on the.8 and.8 models. external in-line rectifier is a standard option only on the. model. NON-MAINTAINED MANUAL RELEASE BRAKE RELEASE INDICATOR A mechanical switch which is activated by the manual release lever, and can be used to disconnect power in case of accidental start-up when the brake is manually released. 75

76 Series 3 & Series 3 Continued Pricing (Discount Symbol R) Size 3 Series Model 3 Series 3 Series Model 3 Series Options Adders External leads* External Leads* Mounting With Standard Mounting With Release Standard Double Carrier Throughshaft manual manual indicator Inside*** Flange Brake Brake D disc ring disc release Inside*** Flange release switch. Dynamic 3--0G 3--03G $90 $0 3--0G N/A** $0 $60 N/C** $0 $80 $0. Holding 3--G 3--3G G N/A** 0 70 N/C** N/A Dynamic 3--0G 3--0DG G 3--0DG 30 N/C** Holding 3--G 3--DG G 3--DG N/C** Dynamic 3--60G 3--60DG G 3--60DG N/A** N/A** Dynamic 3--70K N/A** K N/A** 37 3 N/A** N/A** Dynamic 3--7K N/A** K N/A** 7 N/A** N/A** Holding K N/A** K N/A** 50 N/A** N/A** mm mount 7 mm mount.8 Dynamic 3--70MK N/A** $30 $ MK N/A** $37 $3 N/A** N/A** $80 $0.8 Holding 3--7MK N/A** MK N/A** 7 N/A** N/A** 80 0 **N/C =No charge N/A =Not Available ***Mounting bolt circle inside (less than) the outside diameter of magnet body. (BC dimensions shown on page 7) Ordering Information Group 3 Armature Actuated Brakes Series = 3 or Options Table 3 Voltages Table Hub Bore and Keyway Table For Double D Bores See Table A 76 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 0G 0H 0J Size /6 3/6 / / 5/6 5/6 3/8 3/8 / Static (lb-in) 3 Dynamic 5 Holding 7 Dynamic Holding Dynamic 35 Dynamic Dynamic 7 Holding no keyway /6 /3 no keyway /6 /3 no keyway /6 /3 no keyway 3/3 3/6 /8 /6 mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm 3 mm. mm Character 7 Numeral Table : Bore Size Keyway Size* Bores Available Characters Bore to Insert Width (in.) x Depth (in.) Mag Body Size..8.8 x x x x x x x NOTE: For non-standard bores add $6.00. Set Screws located 0 from keyway Hubs are provided without keyway *Keyseats made to ANSI B7. standard x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Size..8.8 Numeral or Letter Description Series 0 Standard Brake External Lead Location 3, 3 A Internal Lead Location* 3 or 3 6 External leads Thru-Shaft 3 C Internal Leads* Thru-Shaft 3 Table A: (Double D Bores) Characters to Insert Bore 0F 5/6 0H 3/8 NOTE: Contact factory for Double D disc on brakes greater than 7 lb-in nominal static torque. Can be used up to lb-in holding. Table 3: Options Characters to Insert D G Y Options Short Hub pressure plate mounted Short Hub with Maintained Manual Release Double D Friction Disc Option with Maintained Manual Release Manual release & thru bore size.8 only NOTE: Final part number may change due to specifications or options selected or other product design considerations. A number such as a, 3, etc., in the th position is used to designate a unique brake (custom) and can only be assigned by Stearns Design Engineering Department. Modifications are available - see AAB Modification Section. Numeral or Letter Character Modification E Brake release indicator (NC) F Brake release indicator (NO) G Standard - GGA Friction Material J CCW manual release rotation K Star hub and GGA disc size.8 S Carrier ring friction disc size.8 Table : Standard Coil Voltage Character to Insert Mounting Voltage List Adder Brake Size..8.8 Inside Mount x x x D Flange Mount.8 Mounting Bolt Circle x x 3 Flange Mount. Mounting Bolt Circle x M Body Mount 7 mm Mounting Bolt Circle x Current Rating in Amps Size. Size.8 Size.8 C Vdc E Vdc G 8 Vdc J 90 Vdc K 03 Vdc L 80 Vdc N Vac external in-line $ N/A N/A P 30 Vac external in-line $.00.0 N/A N/A T* Vac Internal Rectifier $30.00 N/A..68* U* 30 Vac Internal Rectifier $30.00 N/A * V Vac external in-line $ QuickSet W 30 Vac external in-line $ QuickSet Z /30 Vac external in-line $ *Internal rectifier not available on size.8 brake with 7mm bolt circle and. brake NOTE: Other voltages available, contact factory. Add $0.00 for nonstandard voltages NOTE: 65 o C maximum ambient temperature for all external in-line rectifiers

77 Series 3 & 3 NEMA C Armature Actuated Brakes Direct mounting to 8C and 56C motors High Cycling Brake Features TENV totally-enclosed non-ventilated Series 3= IP Enclosure, Series 3 = IP5 Enclosure Out-of-box torque - No burnishing required Class B temperature rise with class H mag wire Brake housing integrated with mag body creating a heat exchanger that keeps the brake coil cool Field replaceable coil Splined hub and friction disc Options Internal rectifier Quick-set rectifiers - for fast response time even when wired directly across motor Maintained manual release Brake release indicator switch Single point torque adjustment- to % of nameplate torque Through-shaft Conduit box Quiet armature actuations Carrier ring friction disc 8C 56C 77

78 Series 3 NEMA C Continued Engineering Specifications/Pricing (Discount Symbol R) Motor Frame 8C 56C 3 Series Model Number Nominal Static Lb-ft (Nm) Ordering Information Standard Brake With manual release 3 Series Model Number Standard Brake With manual release 3--83F.5 () $70.00 $ F $ $, F 3 () F , F 6 (8) F,08.00, F 8.3 () F,0.00, G 3 () $ $ G $, $, G 6 (8),090.00, G,6.00, G 0 (),66.00, G,8.00, G (0),30.00, G,58.00, G 5 (3),6.00, G,780.00, Group 3 Armature Actuated Brakes Series = 3 or Approx. Weight lbs kg Power (watts) Hub and Disc inertia (Oz-in-sec ) x x 0 - Options Table 3 Voltages Table Hub Bore and Keyway Table = 5th digit 8C Nominal Static Lb-ft (Nm) 3.5 () 3 () 5 6 (8) () = 5th digit 56C Nominal Static Lb-ft (Nm) 3 3 () 6 (8) 5 0 () 6 (0) 8 5 (3) Table : Bore Sizes Character to insert Bore Character Keyway 8 9 NEMA frame 8C 56C Options = 8th digit Mounting = 7th digit Lead Adder location & Description options = 6th digit 8C 56C 0 External leads External leads & through shaft $3.00 $3.00 A Internal leads - - Bores Available 0B 5/8 3/6 x 3/3 8C & 56C 0D 7/8 3/6 x 3/3 56C only 0K / /8 x /6 8C Other bore sizes available. Add $5.00 for non-standard bore sizes. Table : Standard Coil Voltage Character to Insert Voltage List Adder Current Rating in Amps 8C 56C C Vdc -.7. E Vdc G 8 Vdc J 90 Vdc R 60 Vac Half Wave Internal $.00.. V Vac Internal $60.00 QuickSet.5.0 W 30 Vac Internal $60.00 QuickSet.5.0 Other voltages available. Add $88.00 for non-standard voltage. F G Modification Description NEMA frame size 8C 56C Adder 8C 56C 0 Standard brake - - S Carrier ring friction disc $00.00 $ Table 3: Options Characters to Insert D G Options Standard Brake With Maintained Manual Release 78 NOTE: Final part number may change due to specifications or options selected or other product design considerations. A number such as a, 3, etc., in the th position is used to designate a unique brake (custom) and can only be assigned by Stearns Design Engineering Department. Modifications are available - see AAB Modification Section.

79 Series 33 Armature Actuated Brakes Direct Replacement for European Brakes - *Kebco, Lenze, and Binder The 33 Series have the following design features: Direct Acting rating 3 to 300 lb-ft ( to 00 NM) UL Recognized Class H coil insulation system to US Standards (UR) and Canadian National Standards (CUR) - File E303 Spring-set and voltage released - rectifiers optional Product Overview Series 333 torque adjustable Pre-adjusted air gap for easy assembly Corrosion resistance Spline hub for quiet dependable operation Metric and US Customary bore sizes Options: rectifiers (full and half wave) See pages for rectifier specifications Band seal (boot) Tach/encoder Mounting Manual release - Non- Maintained or Maintained Shaft seal Mounting flange Electronic brake release indicator switch 333 Series Static torque from 3 to 300 lb-ft, with nine different sizes ranging from 7mm bolt circle up to 78 mm bolt circle. can be adjusted down to approximately % of the nameplate torque rating. Shown here with optional nonmaintained manual release lever; other options include boot (band seal), end cap plug, through-shaft seal, and many more listed in the AAB Modification Section. 33 Series Basic brake without the torque adjust option. Available in torque ratings from 3 to 300 lb-ft ( to 00 Nm). Manual release optional, can be provided with non-maintained release lever or maintained release bolts. Metric mount; also can be ordered with C- face adaptor or as the C-face Enclosed version, and as Severe Duty. 33 Series with C-face Adaptor Series 33or Series 333 can be provided with a C-face adaptor for motor frames from 8C through 0/05TC, TSC, UC, USC. All other available modifications for the 33 Series can be ordered for this brake. 33 Series Enclosed Series 33 with a C-face adaptor and a brake housing. Order as an IP3 Enclosure with or without external manual release: 33B Series for brake without torque adjust 33C Series for brake with torque adjust OR IP5 Enclosure with the option of internal maintained manual release: 33H Series for brake without torque adjust 33J Series for brake with torque adjust Also Available Series Magnet body is not machined for a manual release option. See ordering information for the 33 Series brakes. 33 Severe Duty Any of the 33 Series can be ordered as Severe Duty, appropriate for high-cycle rate applications. See ordering information for the 33 series brakes. 33 Series Basic brake with the torque adjust option, and the magnet body not machined for the manual release option. See ordering information for the 33 series brakes. *Kebco is a Registered Trademark of Kebco, Inc. or its affiliates. Lenze is a Registered Trademark of Lenze Power Transmission or its affiliates. Binder is a Registered Trademark of Kendrion or its affiliates. 79

80 Series 33 (without torque adjust) & Series 333 (torque adjustable) Armature Actuated Brakes Dimensions Sizes 7 thru 70 Size Basic Model Number lb-ft (Nm) () (8) (6) (3) (60) (80) Size Basic Model Number D Max B Min. Bore 3 x M 3/8 9*.8 / 3 x M * /8 3 x M * 6.9 7/8 3 x M6 7. * x M8 7/8 * 3 x M8 -/8 * d d d3 d5 d Max. Bore 9/6 3/ 6, 0** 7/8, ** -/8 5, 8** -/8 30, 3** -3/8 35, 38** Thick Plate C Hub length h Thin Plate E F Recommended Hub Location No Plate h h AG Set screw location English bores only * Without keyway pilot bore. ** Keyway to DIN 6885/3 p9 - standard metric keyway DIN 6885/ p9. Size 3: h and h3 dimensions, contact factory. May vary.09 inch. For verification of manual release dimensions, contact factory h w Thick Plate A Thin Plate H No Thick Plate Plate Thin Plate D K N 333 Series only n torque adjust bolts 333 series only 3 3 Specifications - Sizes 7 thru 70/ Unit Pricing (Discount Symbol R3) Size Bolt Circle (mm) Part Number Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) Inertia (Wk ) lb-ft Kgm x 0 - Approx Weight lbs (Kg) Max RPM Power (Watts) Thermal Capacity Hp-Sec/Min 333 adjust brake 33 Without adjust Adder for thick pressure plate Subtract for brake without Pressure Plate Seal (boot) kit Options List Adders Manual Release () (.03) 3600 $7.00 $36.00 $0.00 ($36.00) $.00 $86.00 $0.00 $ (8) (.8) (38.00) (6) (3.07) (.00) (3).0.6. (5.8) (70.00) (60) (6.55) ,86.00, (80.00) (80) (0.5) ,660.00, (9.00) End Cap Plug Thru- Shaft Seal 80

81 Series 33 (without torque adjust) & Series 333 (torque adjustable) Armature Actuated Brakes Dimensions Sizes 96 thru 78 Dimensions Size Basic Model Number lb-ft (Nm) D Max B Min. Bore Max. Bore C Hub length E F Recommended Hub Location AG Set screw location English bores only Pressure Plate A No Plate H Pressure Plate No Plate D K N 333 Series only Min. Max (9) 80 (0) x M8-3/8 0* /8 6 x M * -5/8 5, 8** -7/8 5, ** (00).3-7/8 6 x M * -/ Size Basic Model Number d d d3 d5 d h Pressure Plate No Plate h h3 h * Without keyway pilot bore. ** Keyway to DIN 6885/3 p9 - standard metric keyway DIN 6885/ p9 Specifications - Sizes 96 thru 78 / Unit Pricing (Discount Symbol R3) Size Bolt Circle (mm) Part Number Nominal Static lb-ft (Nm) Inertia (Wk ) lb-ft Kgm x 0 - Approx Weight lbs (Kg) Max RPM Power (Watts) Thermal Capacity Hp-Sec/Min List Price 333 and 33 Series brakes without Pressure Plate Seal (boot) kit Options List Adders Manual Release End Cap Plug Thru- Shaft Seal () (.7) $3,07.00 $, (0) (.3) , , (00) (3.0) , ,

82 Series 33 & Series 333 Armature Actuated Brakes C-Face Mounted Model Number Size NEMA Frame A AJ AK B D E G H HL Hub Length H H3 J L Internal Lead Hole Location 3-3-0F0 7 8C / /80 apart 3-3-0F0 90* 8C / /80 apart 3-3-0G C / /80 apart G0 56C, TC / /80 apart 3-3-0G0 3 56C, TC / /80 apart 3-3-0H TC / G0 * TC / /80 apart H0 8-56TC / H0 70* 8-56TC / H TC / ** None K0 96 3/36TC- 0/05TC / ** 5 *** H0 30* 8-56TC / ** None K K0 78* 3/36TC- 0/05TC 3/36TC- 0/05TC / ** 5 *** / ** 5 *** *On these sizes, the brake diameter is larger than the adaptor mounting/bolt circle. ***On each side of the :00 position (the location of second hole is not shown on above drawing) Frame shaft size may require derate of a larger brake. Confirm hub bore. Available Frames/Sizes and Unit Pricing Discount Symbol R3 Model Number Size Nominal Static Lb-Ft Nm NEMA Frame Size **L min. & max: size 96 =.87 min. &.79 max. size 30/78 =.30 min. &.730 max. Approximate Weight Lbs Kg 333 torque adjust brake 3-3-0F C.76.5 $ without torque adjust $ F C G C G C G C , H TC-56TC , G C , H TC-56TC , H TC-56TC , H TC-56TC , K /0-05TC/TSC/UC/USC , H TC-56TC , K /0-05TC/TSC/UC/USC , K /0-05TC/TSC/UC/USC , ,03.00,38.00,8.00, ,58.00,0.00, ,9.00 7, ,

83 Series 33 & Series 333 Armature Actuated Brakes C-Face with Brake Housing IP3 Enclosure Dimensions/ Unit Pricing IP3 Discount Symbol R3 Model Number Size Nominal Static Lb-Ft (Nm) NEMA Frame* HL G H H3 L For sizes 96 through 78 with C-Face and housing, see Series 3 or Series 360. Internal lead location, Ø and O on N Bolt circle Approximate Weight Lbs (Kg) 33C torque adjust 33B without torque adjust Manual Release Adder 33-H0 3 5 (3) 8TC-56TC on R (9.) $,60.00 $,53.00 $ H0 5 (60) 8TC-56TC on R (0.5),60.00, IP5 Enclosure (No manual release/optional Internal manual release) Dimensions/ Unit Pricing IP5 Discount Symbol R3 Model Number Size Nominal Static Lb-Ft (Nm) NEMA Frame* HL G L Internal lead location, Ø and O on N B.C. Approximate Weight Lbs (Kg) 33J torque adjust 33H without torque adjust Internal Manual Release Adder 33-H0 3 5 (3) 8TC-56TC on R3.8 5 (.35) $, $,80.00 $ H0 5 (60) 8TC-56TC on R3.8 9 (3.6) 3, , H (80) 8TC-56TC on R (6.3) 5, , *For NEMA 8C and 56C mounting, see pages 77-78, Series 3/3 NEMA C. 83

84 Series 33 & Series 333 Continued 8 Ordering Information Numeral AAB-E Unit Sizes Group 3 Armature Acting Brake Metric Mount Numeral Description 0 No torque adjust, mag body not machined for manual release No torque adjust With torque adjust, mag body not machined for manual release 3 With torque adjust B Housing with conduit hole, no torque adjust (Size 7 - ) C Housing with conduit hole, with torque adjust H IP5 housing, no torque adjust (Size 7-70) J IP5 housing, with torque adjust (Size 7-70) Table - Hub Bores * * -EA NOTE: See page 00 for recommended minimum bore size by torque OD-KC Available Bores Bore Keyway Size* Brake Size (in) Width (in) Depth (in) /8 0V 3/3 3/6 std / 0K /8 /6 std std 9/6 0N /8 /6 non std non std 5/8 0B 3/6 3/3 std std non std 3/ 0C 3/6 3/3 non std non std non std 7/8 0D 3/6 3/3 std std std non std 0L / /8 non std std non std -/8 0E / /8 std std std non std -/ 0F / /8 non std non std -3/8 0G 5/6 5/3 std std non std non std -/ 0M 3/8 3/6 std non std non std -5/8 0H 3/8 3/6 std std non std -3/ 0I 3/8 3/6 std non std -7/8 0J / / std std 0L / / non std -/8 0N / / std Metric Width (mm) Depth (mm) Metric Bores Supplied Without Set Screws, circlip recommended.8 std non std 5.3 std std std non std non std 5.3 non std std std non std non std non std non std non std non std non std non std std** std non std non std non std non std** 6.8 std** non std non std non std non std std non std non std non std std non std std non std non std** non std** non std** non std std non std non std non std std std std std std std** non std non std non std non std non std std std std std** std std non std std std std 3.3 non std std non std non std std std std** non std non std non std non std 3.8 std** std std std std Character to insert Numeral Description Reduced torque with air gap shim 3 Reduced torque (severe duty- long life) Standard 5 Size 90 Only; 8.3 lb-ft holding applications only 6 Std torque with air gap shim NOTE: Add the following for non-standard bores: Sizes 7 through 3 = $5.00 Sizes through 96 = $96.00 Sizes 30 & 78 = $ *Standard U.S. Keyseats made to ANSI B7. standard. Standard metric Keyseat DIN 6885/ p9. ** Keyseat to DIN 6885/3 p9. Numeral 0 F G H J K Options Table 3 Voltages - Table Hub bore and keyseat - Table Mounting Style Less pressure plate Thin pressure plate (Size 7-70 only) Thick pressure plate NEMA 8C (Size 7 & 90) NEMA 56C (Size 90, 3, & ) NEMA 80/0/ TC (Size 3,, 70, 96 & 30) NEMA 80 TC/UC (Size 96) NEMA 30/360/00 TC/UC (Size 96, 30, 78) Numeral Enclosure Type 0 Standard Seal (boot) kit thru bore Seal (boot) and end cap plug 3 Seal (boot) and through-shaft seal IP5 Enclosure Contact factory for non-standard coils. Add the following for non-std. coil voltage Sizes 7 through = $88.00 Sizes 3 through 70 = $6.00 Sizes 96 through 78 = $ For separate rectifiers see pages 89-9 Numeral Modifications 0 Standard Table - STD Coil Voltage * A Current Rating in Amps Character Coil to Voltage insert B E /3 Vdc Vdc Table 3 - Options E * Character to Description/Options insert A C J K L R J 90 Vdc K 03 Vdc L 80 Vdc M 05 Vdc S 58 Vdc N* Vac N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P* 30 Vac N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Vac V** N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A quickset 30 Vac W** N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A quickset *In-line rectifier. Add $9.00 to brake list price. **In-line quickset rectifier. Add $0.00 to brake list price. Basic brake Option A with non-maintained release Steel hub w/manual release (for press-fit applications) Steel hub, no manual release Internal manual release, non-maintained Maintained manual release (bolts) 78 C Vdc N/A Modifications are availablesee AAB Modification Section

85 Series 3 Armature Actuated Brakes Brake with IP56 Aluminum Cover Features rating 0-00 Nm, lb-ft Universal mounting Class H insulation Maintained manual release Corrosion resistance (stainless steel external hardware) IP56 enclosure protection (available in ductile cast iron or aluminum cover) ABS, CSA and CE certification Brake showing space heater and release indicator location Simple wear adjustment with access hole for air gap inspection Metric and US Customary bore sizes C-Face mounting - various adapter plates available for 8TC through 05TSC frame mounting Splined hub for quiet dependable operation Installation Instructions/Parts List: P/N Reverse view showing adapter mounting plate orientation Standard Options rectifier (see pages 86-89) Tach/encoder mounting Space Heater, 30 or 60 Vac Thru-shaft IEC D and C Flange Conduit Box- specify F or F location (F location shown) F Conduit Box location shown. F location on left side facing brake housing. C AG set NEMA Mount HL Hub Size B AJ AK Min. Bore Max. Bore D** D*** B Z L M S P J A** A*** J Hub screw frame lb-ft Nm Bolt Location in mm in mm length location TC- 56TSC / * TC- 56TSC / * TC- 86TSC / * TC- 05TSC / * TC- 86TSC / * TC- 05TSC / * TC- 05TSC / *Key to DIN 6885/3p9-Standard Metric Keyway DIN 6885/p9 D** & A** for Aluminum Cover D*** & A*** for Ductile Iron Cover Component Materials: Adapter plate - steel (zinc plate) Splined hub - steel (zinc plate) Splined carrier - aluminum Armature - steel (zinc plate) Magnet body - steel (zinc plate) Hardware - steel (corrosion resistant plating or stainless) Cover: Size 96-8T thru 86TS NEMA - Aluminum (anodized) (additional paint optional) Size 96-3T thru 05TS NEMA - Cast Iron (primed) (additional paint optional) Size 30-8T thru 05TS NEMA - Cast Iron (primed ) (additional paint optional) Size 78-3T thru 05TS NEMA - Cast Iron (primed) (additional paint optional) 85

86 Series 3 Continued UnitSpecifications/Pricing (Discount Symbol R5) Size NEMA Frame Nominal Static Part Number lb-ft Nm Ductile Cast Iron Aluminum Cover Ductile Iron Weight/lbs Aluminum Max RPM Thermal Capacity Hp-Sec/Min List Price Electronic Brake Release Indicator* Options Space Terminal IP66 Conduit Heater Strip Box 96 8TC- 56TSC H H $8,53.00 $ $6.00 $0.00 $ TC- 56TSC H H , TC- 86TSC J J , TC- 05TSC K K , TC- 86TSC J J , TC- 05TSC K K , TC- 05TSC K K , *Remote mount device Ordering Information Part number example: Group 3 Armature Acting Brake (Direct acting with a Coil) Mounting Design Numeral Design 5 Pressure Plate Mount JCOMEA Options Table 3 Voltages - Table Hub bore and keyset - Table Character to insert 0G 0M 0H 0I 0J 0L 0N Metric Numeral/ Alpha Numeral 5 Magnet Body Size Brake Cover Type Ductile Iron Aluminum lb-ft Table - Hub Bores NOTE: See page 00 for recommended minimum bore sizes by torque Keyway Size* Bores Available Bore Width Depth Unit Size (in.) (in.) /6 5/3.0 3/8 3/6.65 3/8 3/6.7 3/8 3/6.875 / /.000 / /. / / Bore Width Depth ** ** /Modification Reduced Standard Numeral Enclosure IP66 conduit box* H with terminal strip M IP66 conduit box* *Specify F or F location for conduit box modification Table - Coil Voltage Character to Insert Current Rating Coil Voltage E Vdc J 90 Vdc K 03 Vdc L 80 Vdc..5.6 M 05 Vdc B /3 Vdc..6.8 Other voltages available - consult factory For rectifiers see pages Additional Options Standard Brake Space Heater Space Heater 30 Space Heater 60 3 Brake release indicator NO/NC Brake release indicator NO/NC Space Heater 5 Brake release indicator NO/NC Space Heater 30 6 Brake release indicator NO/NC Space Heater 60 7 Mounting NEMA 80/0/ C-face NEMA 80 C-face NEMA 30/00 C-face NEMA 0 C-face Mt* NEMA 0 C-face Mt* IEC 3 C-face Mt* IEC 60 C-face Mt* IEC 3 D-face Mt* IEC 60 D-face Mt* IEC 80 D-face Mt* IEC 00 D-face Mt* IEC 5 D-face Mt* *Contact factory for pricing on these mounting options Table 3 - Additional Options No manual release A Maintained release (standard) R H J K L M S T U V W Y NOTE: Final part number may change due to specifications or options selected or other product design considerations. A number such as a, 3, etc., in the th position is used to designate a unique brake (custom) and can only be assigned by Stearns Design Engineering Department. Modifications are available - see AAB Modification Section *Standard U.S. keyseats made to ANSI B7. standard. Standard metric keyseat DIN 6885/ p9. **Keyseat to DIN 6885/3 p9.

87 Series 360 Armature Actuated Brakes (Magnet Body Mounted) Shown with optional conduit box Reverse view showing adapter mounting plate orientation Features Universal mounting Internal maintained manual release IP56 enclosure ABS, CE, and CSA Certification Brake gaskets are captive (O-Ring), so parts are not lost during maintenance Brake showing space heater and release indicator location Stainless Steel nameplate (exterior) Modular brake assembly Install and remove brake without having to readjust air gaps Class H insulation Installation Instructions and Parts List: P/N Standard Brake Options Rectifier (see pages 86-89) Tach/encoder mounting Space Heater Electronic brake release indicator Contact Factory for Electronic Wear Indicator Thru-Shaft Optional external non-maintained/maintained manual release Optional IP66 conduit box mounted on adapter plate. Wiring is not disturbed when brake housing is removed F Conduit Box location shown. F location on left side facing brake housing. Dimensional Data Sizes 70 through 78 Size Model NEMA Frame Note: Dimensions for estimating purposes only. lb-ft Nm B AJ AK Mount Bolt D E B Z L h h3 S P A C HL Hub Hub Location Length TC TC / TC TC / TC TC / TC-05TSC / TC-05TSC / TC S.S. Location Component Materials for 36- Series: Adapter plate - steel (zinc phosphate, prime & paint) Splined hub - steel (zinc plate) Armature - steel (normalized) Pressure Plate - steel (normalized) Magnet body - steel (zinc plated) Housing - ductile iron (primed & painted): Hardware - steel (corrosion resistant plated or stainless) 87

88 Series 360 Continued Specifications/Unit Pricing (Discount Symbol R5) Size NEMA Frame Nominal Static Model Number Thermal lb-ft Nm Capacity Hp-Sec/Min Approx weight lbs. External Maintained/Deadman Manual Release Electronic Brake Release Indicator Space Heater Terminal Strip IP-66 Conduit Box TC H0 $6, $0.00 $ $6.00 $0.00 $ TC H0 0 6, TC J0 7, TC H0 8, TC H , TC J0 9, TC J0 9, TC/36-365TC K0 0, TC/36-365TC K0 3, TC L0 3, Ordering Information Part number example: Group 3 Armature Acting Brake (Direct acting with a Coil) 36-7 JCOMES Options Table 3 Mounting Design Numeral Design 6 Magnet Body Mount Voltages - Table Hub bore and keyset - Table Numeral/ Alpha Magnet Body Size Numeral lb-ft Brake Cover Type Ductile Iron Numeral Enclosure IP56 Enclosure (standard) H IP66 conduit box* with terminal strip M IP66 conduit box* /Modification 3 Reduced Standard *Specify F or F location for conduit box modification Additional Options Standard Brake Space Heater Space Heater 30 Space Heater 60 3 Brake release indicator Switch NO/NC Brake release indicator NO/NC Space Heater 5 Brake release indicator NO/NC Space Heater 30 6 Brake release indicator NO/NC Space Heater 60 7 Wear indicator NO NO A Wear indicator NO/NC Space Heater B Wear indicator NO/NC Space Heater 30 C Wear indicator NO/NC Space Heater 60 D 0 88 Table - Hub Bores NOTE: See page 00 for recommended minimum bore sizes by torque Keyway Size* Bores Available Character Bore Unit Size to insert Width Depth (in.) (in.) E. / /8 0F. / /8 0G.375 5/6 5/3 0M.0 3/8 3/6 0H.65 3/8 3/6 0I.7 3/8 3/6 0J.875 / / 0L.000 / / 0N. / / 0R.375 5/8 5/6 Metric Bore Width Depth *Standard U.S. keyseats made to ANSI B7. standard. Metric keyseats to DIN 6885/ p9. Table - Coil Voltage Character to Insert Current Rating Coil Voltage E Vdc J 90 Vdc K 03 Vdc L 80 Vdc M 05 Vdc S 58 Vdc B /3 Vdc Other voltages available - consult factory For rectifiers see pages 89-9 Mounting/Size NEMA 80/0/ C-face NEMA 80 C-face NEMA 30/00 C-face NEMA 0 C-face Mt* NEMA 0 C-face Mt* IEC 3 C-face Mt* IEC 60 C-face Mt* IEC 3 D-face Mt* IEC 60 D-face Mt* IEC 80 D-face Mt* IEC 00 D-face Mt* IEC 5 D-face Mt* Table 3 - Additional Options Standard - Internal R Maintained Manual Release External Non-Maintained (deadman) and Maintained S Manual Release H J K L M S T U V W Y *Contact factory for pricing on these mounting options NOTE: Final part number may change due to specifications or options selected or other product design considerations. A number such as a, 3, etc., in the th position is used to designate a unique brake (custom) and can only be assigned by Stearns Design Engineering Department. Modifications are available - see AAB Modification Section.

89 Rectifiers for use with Armature Actuated Brakes Product Overview NOTE: For brake response times with and without rectifiers see page 97. Full Wave Output A rectifier in which both positive and negative half-cycles of the incoming () signal are rectified to produce a unidirectional () current through the load. The output voltage of a full wave rectifier is V =.90V. Maximum operating voltage is +0% of nominal, frequency /60 Hz, maximum ambient temperature range of -0 C to 65 C Half Wave Input Input Output A rectifier in which only alternate half-cycles of the incoming () signal are rectified to produce a unidirectional () current through the load. The output voltage of a half wave rectifier is V =.5V. Maximum operating voltage is +0% of nominal, frequency /60 Hz, maximum ambient temperature range of -0 C to 65 C Combination Full and Half Wave Provides option of utilizing either full or half wave rectification Maximum operating voltage is +0% of nominal, frequency /60 Hz. Maximum ambient temperature range is -0 C to 65 C TOR- Full and Half Wave Provides coil turn off nearly as fast as side switching. Includes line filter for drive applications or whenever electrical filtering is required to protect the rectifier from high-frequency electrical line pulses. Must be switched on/off by a switch in an lead of the TOR-. Maximum operating voltage +0% of nominal, frequency /60 Hz. Maximum ambient temperature range is -0 C to 65 C QuickSet A rectifier that provides a quick brake response time even when the rectifier is permanently wired across the windings of an motor. The QuickSet Rectifier detects the decaying, motor generated voltage that occurs when power is removed from the motor circuit, and interrupts brake coil current in response. QuickSet Rectifiers can be specified full wave or half wave. Operating voltage is ±0% of nominal, frequency /60 Hz. Maximum ambient temperature range is -0 C to 65 C QuickSet/QuickRelease A rectifier that provides a timed, full wave rectified over-excitation brake release function, followed by continuous, half wave rectified brake released holding function, when used in conjunction with an appropriate brake coil voltage rating. USED AS WATTSAVER: Provides a timed, full wave rectified brake release function, followed by continuous, half wave rectified brake released wattsaver function, when used in conjunction with an appropriate brake coil voltage rating. The Wattsaver serves to reduce the electrical power consumption and dissipation of the brake in the released state. Input Output Operating voltage is ±0% of nominal, frequency /60 Hz. Maximum ambient temperature varies by part number - see information by part number on following pages. Bi-Phase Rectifiers A rectifier that is typically used in single phase, reversing, permanent split capacitor (PSC) motor applications. A single phase, reversing, PSC motor typically has two windings of equivalent resistance. The winding which serves as the main winding is connected directly across the power line, the winding which serves as the auxiliary winding is connected in series with a run capacitor across the power line. The direction of rotation is reversed by interchanging the function of the two windings. The Bi-Phase Rectifier provides the same voltage to the brake coil regardless of the direction of rotation of the motor. The Bi-Phase Rectifier has five leads and comes in standard response and QuickSet versions. Bi-Phase Rectifiers are application specific. Please contact factory for more information. Up Down Capacitor Bi-phase Rectifier Module PSC Motor Brake 89

90 Rectifiers Continued Selection & Pricing Vac Input Voltage **At Vdc coil voltage, this rectifier can be used on brake sizes 7-. At 03 Vdc coil voltage, this rectifier can be used on brake sizes At all other listed coil voltages, this rectifier can be used on any brakes size. Brake Sizes Part Number Input /60 Hz Output Full Wave Brake Coil Voltage/Letter Designation Switching K 03 K or J ac or dc side or connect across motor terminals ALL 090K 03 K or J ac or dc side or connect across motor terminals ALL 0903K 03 K or J ac or dc side or connect across motor terminals Combination Full and Half Wave Brake Sizes Part Number ** 090K Brake Sizes Part Number Input /30 60/575 Input 7-096K Output /03 07/59 /57 Brake Coil Voltage/ Letter Designation Vdc = G 03 Vdc = K 07 Vdc = M 59 Vdc = S Vdc = B 57 Vdc = A Switching ac or dc side or connect across motor terminals Quick Set/Quick Release or 03 Vdc Wattsaver Output 03 Vdc over-excitation Vdc Sustaining Brake Coil Voltage/ Letter Designation G Switching ac side only or connect across motor terminals Discount Symbol R3 Connection ac leads dc terminal block ac terminal block dc terminal block ac leads dc leads Connection ac terminal block dc terminal block Connection ac terminal block dc terminal block Max Current (amps).8 $ $ $0.00 Max Current (amps).8 $80.00 Max Current (amps).0.0 $ Vac Input Voltage **At Vdc coil voltage, this rectifier can be used on brake sizes 7-. At 03 Vdc coil voltage, this rectifier can be used on brake sizes At all other listed coil voltages, this rectifier can be used on any brakes size. Brake Sizes Part Number Input /60 Hz Output Brake Coil Voltage/Letter Designation Full Wave Switching ALL 090K M ac or dc side or connect across motor terminals ALL 090K M ac or dc side or connect across motor terminals ALL 0903K M ac or dc side or connect across motor terminals Combination Full and Half Wave Brake Sizes Part Number ** 090K Brake Sizes ALL Brake Sizes Part Number 090K 090K Part Number Input /30 60/575 Input /60 Hz Output /03 07/59 /57 Brake Coil Voltage/ Letter Designation Vdc = G 03 Vdc = K 07 Vdc = M 59 Vdc = S Vdc = B 57 Vdc = A Switching ac or dc side or connect across motor terminals TOR- Rectifier with Line Filter, Full Wave Output Brake Coil Voltage/ Letter Designation Switching M ac side only Input /60 Hz Output QuickSet Brake Coil Voltage/ Letter Designation ALL 0960K M Max Brake Sizes Part Number Ambient Temp Input /60 Hz K 65 o C 30 Switching NONE-connect across motor terminals QuickSet/QuickRelease or 05 Vdc Wattsaver Output 07 Vdc over-excitation 03 Vdc sustaining Brake Coil Voltage/ Letter Designation K or J Switching ac side only or connect across motor terminals Connection ac leads dc terminal block ac terminal block dc terminal block ac leads dc leads Connection ac terminal block dc terminal block Connection Terminals Leadwires Connection ac terminal block dc terminal block Connection ac terminal block dc terminal block Max Current (amps).8 $ $ $0.00 Max Current (amps).8 $80.00 Max Current (amps).6 $30.00 Max Current (amps) Max Current (amps) $0.00 $

91 Rectifiers Selection/Pricing Continued 60 Vac Input Voltage **At Vdc coil voltage, this rectifier can be used on brake sizes 7-. At 03 Vdc coil voltage, this rectifier can be used on brake sizes At all other listed coil voltages, this rectifier can be used on any brakes size. Brake Sizes ALL Brake Sizes Part Number 0930K Part Number ** 090K Brake Sizes Part Number Input /60 Hz Output Half Wave Brake Coil Voltage/Letter Designation Switching L M ac or dc side or connect across motor terminals Combination Full and Half Wave Input /30 60/575 Input Output /03 07/59 /57 Output Brake Coil Voltage/ Letter Designation Vdc = G 03 Vdc = K 07 Vdc = M 59 Vdc = S Vdc = B 57 Vdc = A TOR- with Line Filter Brake Coil Voltage/Letter Designation Switching Switching ac or dc side or connect across motor terminals Discount Symbol R3 Connection ac terminal block dc terminal block Connection ac terminal block dc terminal block Connection Max Current (amps).8 $9.00 Max Current (amps) Max Current (amps).8 $80.00 ALL 090K 60 B / Full ac side only Terminals 0.3 $0.00 ALL 0905K 60 B / Full ac side only Leadwires 0.3 $0.00 ALL 09K M / Half ac side only Terminals 0.3 $0.00 ALL 09K M / Half ac side only Leadwires 0.3 $0.00 ALL 093K M / Half ac side only Terminals 0.6 $37.00 ALL 09K M / Half ac side only Leadwires 0.6 $37.00 Brake Sizes Brake Sizes Part Number Input Output ALL 0980K 60 ALL 098K Part Number Max Ambient Temp Input /60 Hz K 5 o C 60 QuickSet Brake Coil Voltage/ Letter Designation B Fullwave M Halfwave Switching NONE-connect across motor terminals NONE-connect across motor terminals QuickSet/QuickRelease or Vdc Wattsaver Output Vdc over-excitation 07 Vdc sustaining Brake Coil Voltage/ Letter Designation M Switching ac side only or connect across motor terminals Connection ac terminal block dc terminal block ac terminal block dc terminal block Connection ac terminal block dc terminal block Max Current (amps) Max Current (amps) $ $0.00 $ Vac Input Voltage **At Vdc coil voltage, this rectifier can be used on brake sizes 7-. At 03 Vdc coil voltage, this rectifier can be used on brake sizes At all other listed coil voltages, this rectifier can be used on any brakes size. Brake Sizes ALL ALL Brake Sizes Brake Sizes Part Number 0590K UL E K Part Number Input /60 Hz Output Half Wave Brake Coil Voltage/Letter Designation Switching L ac side only or connect S across motor terminals L S ac side only or connect across motor terminals Combination Full and Half Wave Input /60 Hz Output QuickSet Brake Coil Voltage/ Letter Designation Switching ALL 0598K S NONE-connect across motor terminals TOR- with Line Filter - Half Wave Brake Sizes ALL Part Number ** 090K Part Number 059K 059K Input /30 60/575 Input /60 Hz Output /03 07/59 /57 Output Brake Coil Voltage/ Letter Designation Vdc = G 03 Vdc = K 07 Vdc = M 59 Vdc = S Vdc = B 57 Vdc = A Brake Coil Voltage/ Letter Designation Switching ac or dc side or connect across motor terminals Switching S ac side only Connection ac leads dc terminal block ac leads dc leads Connection ac terminal block dc terminal block Connection ac terminal block dc terminal block Connection terminals leadwires Max Current (amps) Max Current (amps) Max Current (amps) Max Current (amps).8 $ $ $ $ $0.00 9

92 Rectifiers Continued Rectifier Dimensions Tape Mount Part Number Length Width Ht Connection K Leadwire, 7 long Terminal K Terminal Terminal K Leadwire,.5 long Leadwire,.5 long K Terminal Terminal K Leadwire, 7 long Leadwire, 7 long K Leadwire, 7 long Terminal Terminal location or connection may differ from sketch Flange or Tape Mount Part Number A B C D E F K K K K K K K K Part Number A B C D E F Mount K Tape K Flange K Flange --09-K Flange --09-K Flange K Flange K K K K K Wiring Diagrams/Switching NOTE: For brake response times with and without rectifiers see page 0 Side Switching Brake coil Side Switching Rectifier module Brake coil Connected Across Motor Terminals (No switching) Brake coil Rectifier module Use side switching with the following Rectifiers ONLY: K, K, K, K, K Rectifier module 9

93 Electronic Brake Release Indicator (Proving Switch) Armature-Actuated Brake Series Indicates when the brake is released by sensing the change in the brake coil current waveform. For use with the Series 333/3/360 brakes Features Mount in remote location (control cabinet) Operating temperature -0 C through 65 C STEARNS ELECTRONIC PROVING SWITCH INPUT V Not susceptible to common problems of PART NUMBER mechanical switches, such as mechanical PATENT NUMBER 6,6,67 fatigue, tolerances, and vibration. Relay contacts are silver-cadmium oxide Utilize either normally-open contacts (UL rated -0A, inductive or resistive, at -0 V and CSA rated 0A, inductive or resistive at 0 V) or normally-closed contacts (UL rated -0A, inductive or resistive, at -0 V and CSA rated 0A, inductive or resistive, at 0 V) Brake Operation When electrical power is applied to the armature-actuated brake coil, the armature is attracted by the electromagnetic force generated by the magnet body, which overcomes spring action. This allows the friction disc to rotate freely. When electrical power is interrupted, the electromagnetic force is removed and the pressure spring mechanically forces the armature plate to clamp the friction disc between itself and the pressure plate. This develops torque to stop or hold the load. Switch Operation When the brake armature is pulled in to the magnet body to release the brake, a change in the brake coil current waveform occurs. By tracking this change in the brake coil current, the electronic switch indicates when the brake is released. Ordering Information Wiring Instructions: See sheet P/N Dimensions V Unit xø WIRE ENTRY Discount Symbol $ R3 Part Number Example: V thru 0V Units Characters Voltage* To Insert Specify brake model number. The last digits of the switch part number will depend upon the brake size xø.88 WIRE ENTRY.5.0 *Standard voltages listed. For other voltages, contact factory. *Standard voltages listed. For other voltages, contact factory. NOTE: Cannot be used with half-wave rectifier. Use with full-wave or TOR- full-wave rectifier only. 93

94 Armature Actuated Brake Modifications Series 30/3/3 Modification Series Brake Size Maintained Manual Release 30/3/ $.00 $60.00 $60.00 $60.00 Non-Maintained Manual Release 30/3/ $.00 $60.00 $60.00 $60.00 Brake Manual Release Indicator Switch Manual release engaged 30/3/3 ALL $80.00 Rectifiers, In-Line 30/30/3/3 ALL (Except Quick Set) Quick Set $.00 $80.00 Rectifiers, Internal 30/3/3.8 and.8 $30.00 Encoder Mount 30/30/3/3 tapped holes in magnet body for tether mount $.00 Through-Shaft 30 See catalog pg. N/C Mounting Plates Double D Disc 3/3 ALL (through-shaft combined with manual release only available on size.8) 30/3/3 Size Bolt Circle..5/.6.8, ,.8 3.5,.5 register.0.8 $0.00 $30.00 $60.00 $0.00 $ /3/3.,.8, and.0 Contact factory for Double D disc on brakes rated greater than 7 lb-in No charge Carrier Ring Disc 30/3/3.8 $0.00 9

95 Armature Actuated Brake Modifications Series 333/3/360 Maintained Manual Release Manual Release Access Plugs Modification Series Brake Size Adder 333 ALL size 7 $86.00 size 90 $00.00 size $0.00 size 3 $6.00 size $0.00 size 70 $60.00 size 96 $ size 30 $ size 78 $5.00 3/360 ALL Standard feature Non-Maintained Manual Release Electronic Brake Release Indicator Switch 333 ALL 360 ALL size 7 $86.00 size 90 $00.00 size $0.00 size 3 $6.00 size $0.00 size 70 $60.00 size 96 $ size 30 $ size 78 $5.00 size 70 $0.00 size $ /3/360 ALL $ Electronic Wear Indicator Switch 333/3/360 ALL $ Rectifiers, In-Line 333 size 7-90 Vac size 7-30 Vac $9.00 standard in-line $0.00 in-line quickset Rectifiers, Separate 333/3/360 ALL see rectifier pages Conduit Box 333/3/360 ALL $0.00 3/360 with IP67 conduit box ALL $

96 Series 333/3/360 Modifications Modification Series Brake Size Band Seal (Boot) End Cap Plug Space Heater 333 ALL 333 ALL size 7 $.00 size 90 $.00 size $8.00 size 3 $0.00 size $68.00 size 70 $00.00 size 96 $6.00 size 30 $.00 size 78 $80.00 size 7 $0.00 size 90 $30.00 size $0.00 size 3 $.00 size $90.00 size 70 $90.00 size 96 $00.00 size 30 $0.00 size 78 $ /3/360 ALL Sizes 7- $3.00 Sizes 3-78 $6.00 Tach Machining Through-Shaft 333 tapped holes in magnet body for tether mount 3/360 Machining on brake housing ALL $.00 ALL Size 70 $,68.00 Sizes $, through-shaft seal in magnet body ALL Sizes 7-70 $35.00 Sizes $ /360 through-shaft hole in housing with shaft seal ALL $

97 Technical Data SAB Motor Frame Adapter Dimensions Selection To select an adapter for a specific brake, refer to the Motor Frame Adapter Tables as shown in the brake series sections of this Catalog. After selecting the adapter stock number, refer to the Tables below for dimensions. All adapters are constructed with an opening for internal lead wire connection, corresponding to the NEMA standard location for the motor frame size. Screws for mounting adapter to motor must be provided by customer. Socket head cap screws are supplied for mounting brake to adapter. B dia. AK dia. Motor Side A F D dia. L AL dia. Brake Side BK TO MODIFICATION INDE 5 BK four mounting holes (brake to adapter). Four mounting holes for BF diameter socket head screws (adapter to motor). AJ dia. AH dia. Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes, request certified prints. Brake Series (lb-ft) Adapter Stock Number Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) A AH AJ AK AL B BF BK Hole D F L Add l Shaft Length Req d List Price Discount Symbol 56, $700 B 65,300* /8-6 x / deep 56,000 (3.75) (9.) (8.) (.900) (.35) (8.60) (.70) (0.60) (.76) (3.8) (3.88) and (.95) (.75) $700 B 56,800* 87, and $875 87,800* 6-05 B (6.99) (79.0) (37.55) (.875) (330.0) (.88) (0.78) (9.5) (.0) 87, (37.60) (.89) $,8 / - 3 through 87,000 (8.) (.76) and $ 87,800* 6-05 ** B (5.0) (8.60) (66.700) (.875) (79.0) (8.75) (6.35) (0.57) 87,300* (66.75) (.89) $,800 87,000, 87,800* and 87,300* 8,000 8, , ,000 and 8,300* 8,000 and 8,300* 8,000 and 8,300* 86, (9.05).06 (6.99). (8.58).9 (9.).38 (3.9).38 (3.9).56 (38.69) 7.5 (8.).00 (79.0).00 (79.0).00 (79.0).00 (355.60) 5.88 (9.35).00 (355.60) 7.5 (8.) 9.00 (8.60).00 (355.60) 7.5 (8.) 9.00 (8.60).00 (379.0)..7 (.35) (.8) (06.5) (06.57) (.900) (.95) (66.700) (66.75) (06.5) (06.57) (.900) (.95) (66.700) (66.75).0. (37.0) (37.60) (.875) (.89) (37.75) (37.398) (37.75) (37.398) (37.75) (37.398) (06.00) (06.73) 8.75 (.5) 6. (9.0) (37.75) (37.398) 6. (9.0) 3.5 (336.55) 3.5 (336.55) 6.9 (.6).6 (.75).6 (.88). (.70).6 (.88). (.70).6 (.88) / - 3 through 5/8 - through 5/8 - through 5/8 - x deep 5/8 - through 5/8 - x 3/ deep.00 (0.60) 9.75 (7.65) 6.00 (.0) 7.75 (96.85) 9. (.30) 6.00 (.0) 7.75 (96.85) 8.6 (9.08).9 (.76).9 (.76).9 (.76).9 (.76).5 (6.35).5 (6.35) (6.35).56 (.3).87 (.0).93 (3.6) $,35.93 (3.6) * /-3 flat head screws are supplied with adapter. ** When adding an adapter to a hazardous location brake, refer to the mounting requirements on the product page for the recommended brake series for accommodating adapters..9 (.76).5 (6.35).75 (.5).9 (30.3).9 (30.3).37 (3.80) $,300 B $,875 C C C $,875 C $,35 C $,075 C $,800 C 97

98 Foot Mounting Kits BK TO MODIFICATION INDE Brake Side Motor Side Brake Side Kits include the foot mounting bracket and hardware to fit the BF mounting holes. Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes, request certified prints. Foot Brake Series Mounting Kit Number A AJ AK B BB No. BF Thd. Dimensions in Inches (Dimensions in Millimeters) C D E FA FB G H J K L Wgt. M lbs. No. List Price Discount Symbol , (77.80) (9.).75 (.9).38 (60.3). (3.8) 3/ (65.0) 3. (88.90).88 (73.0). (38.0) _.38 (9.5). (0.3). (38.0). (.70). (63.).5 $0.00 B , (9.08) (8.) (.89) 3.00 (76.0).5 (6.35) /-3 (8.95) (7.00) 3.56 (90.9).00 (.80) _.38 (9.5).53 (3.9).6 (.8).56 (.9) 5.75 ( B.99 8, (393.70) (79.0)( 8, ) 7.00 (77.80).5 (6.35) /8- (336.55) (.90) (7.6).00 (.80).00 (0.60).6 (.88).69 (7.6) 3.00 (76.0).88 (.) 9.00 (8.60) 0,35.00 C 86, (63.55) (355.60) ( 06.73) (03.0). (5.56) /8- (3.80) (76.) (6.9) 3.38 (85.7) 3.00 (76.0).00 (5.0).8 (0.6). (0.78). (30.96) 8. (.90) 75 3, C 98

99 Dimensions for C-Face Brake Motor Systems Brakes Externally Wired to Motor C-face motor with double shaft extension. Stearns Disc Brakes are designed to mount on standard C-face motors having the same dimensions and tolerances on the accessory end as on the drive end. They also mount on foot mounting brackets and machine mounting faces having the same mounting dimensions and tolerances. Some motor accessory end C-face may differ from the drive end. Accessory End Drive End Drive End Dimensions (Inches) Frame Designation C 8C 56C 3TC and TC 8TC and 8TC 8TCH and 8TCH 3TC and TC 5TC and 56TC 8TC and 86TC 8TSC and 86TSC 3TC and 36TC 3TSC and 36TSC 36TC and 365TC 36TSC and 365TSC 0TC and 05TC 0TSC and 05TSC TC and 5TC TSC and 5TSC 0 Frame Series AJ AK BB Min Number BF Hole Bolt Tap Size Penetration Allowance /-0 /-0 3/8-6 3/8-6 /-3 3/8-6 /-3 /-3 /-3 /-3 5/8-5/8-5/8-5/8-5/8-5/8-5/8-5/8-5/ U AH R Keyseat ES Min S flat flat Base to Centerline D Tolerances (Inches) AK Dimension, Face Runout, Permissible Eccentricity of Mounting Rabbet Shaft Extension Diameters AK Dimension Less than and Larger Tolerance on AK Dimension Plus Minus Maximum Face Runout Maximum Permissible Eccentricity of Mounting Rabbet Shaft Diameter 0.0 to.00, inclusive Over.00 to 6.0, inclusive Plus Tolerances Minus Width of Shaft Extension Keyseats Shaft Runout Width of Keyseat Plus Tolerances Minus Shaft Diameter Maximum Permissible Shaft Runout 0.88 to 0.7, inclusive Over 0.7 to.0, inclusive to.65, inclusive Over.65 to 6.0, inclusive SOURCE: ANSI/NEMA Standards Publication No. MG -987; Part and Part. 99

100 Dimensions for C-Face Brake Motor System (cont.) Accessory End FC face mounting for accessories, including brakes, on the end opposite the drive end of motor. Some motor accessory end C-face may differ from the drive end. Confirm shaft diameter and bolt circle before ordering. 5 0 Opening for leads to accessory. 5 0 DP FBD DP FBD FAJ FAK FAK FAJ FBF FBF 3TFC to 8TFC Frames, Inclusive 3TFC to 36TFC Frames, Inclusive Dimensions (Inches) Frame Designation FAJ FAK FBD Max. Number FBF Hole Bolt Tap Size Penetration Allowance Hole for Accessory Leads DP Diameter 3TFC and TFC 8TFC and 8TFC 3TFC and TFC 5TFC and 56TFC 8TFC and 86TFC 3TFC and 36TFC /8-6 3/8-6 /-3 /-3 /-3 5/ NOTE: Standards have not been developed for the shaft extenison diameter and length, and keyseat dimensions. Tolerances* (Inches) FAK Dimension, Face Runout, Permissible Eccentricity of Mounting Rabbet FAK Dimension Less than and Larger Tolerance on FAK Dimension Plus Minus Maximum Face Runout Maximum Permissible Eccentricity of Mounting Rabbet * Tolerance requirement on 56,00 and 87,000 Series Brake kits is.0 T.I.R. (total indicated runout shaft to motor register face). Shaft Runout Shaft Diameter 0.37 to.65, inclusive Over.65 to 6.0, inclusive Maximum Permissible Shaft Runout SOURCE: ANSI/NEMA Standards Publication No. MG -987; Part and Part. Stearns Recommended Minimum Shaft Diameter by Minimum recommended shaft size considers a keyed C05 steel shaft under dynamic use in a typical spring set brake application. ft-lb Minimum Shaft (inches) ft-lb Minimum Shaft (inches) Nm Nm 8 Nm 6 Nm 3 Nm 60 Nm 80 Nm Nm 0 Nm Minimum Shaft (mm) ø0 mm ø3 mm ø6 mm ø0 mm ø5 mm ø8 mm ø3 mm ø39 mm Nm ø7 mm

101 Set and Release Times The models listed below were tested for typical set and release times. Times listed below are defined as follows: T = Total set time to 80% of rated static torque T = Release time, measured as the time from when the power is applied to the brake to the time that the solenoid plunger or armature is fully seated. NOTE: Times will vary with the motor used, and brakes tested with factory-set air gap. The times shown should be used as a guide only. SAB T/T Time in Milliseconds Series Static lb-ft 56,000 / 5 Coil Size K, K, K+, M+ T T 5 87,000 0,, 5, 5 & ,000 35,75, ,000 8,000 All Brake and motor are switched separately. All brakes tested in horizontal position. Coil is energized for > hours before testing. Ambient temperature 70 F at time of test. AAB Series 333 Times in Milliseconds Size Applied Voltage/Type of Switching T T AAB Series 30/3/30/3 Times in Milliseconds Series 30 Side Switching Size T T Series 3 Side Switching Size T T 7 35 Series 30 Side Switching Size T T Series 30 Full wave rectifier/ Side Switching Size T T Series 3 Side Switching 3 Side Switching Size T T side switching 30 Vac/ac side switching/full wave 60 Vac/ac side switching/half wave side switching 30 Vac/ac side switching/full wave 60 Vac/ac side switching/half wave 30 Vac connected across motor full wave 30 Vac connected across motor /quickset side switching 30 Vac/ac side switching/full wave 60 Vac/ac side switching/half wave side switching 30 Vac/ac side switching/full wave 60 Vac/ac side switching/half wave side switching 30 Vac/ac side switching/full wave 60 Vac/ac side switching/half wave 30 Vac connected across motor full wave 30 Vac connected across motor /quickset 60 Vac/ac side switching/half wave/with air gap shim side switching 30 Vac/ac side switching/full wave 60 Vac/ac side switching/half wave side switching 30 Vac/ac side switching/full wave 60 Vac/ac side switching/half wave side switching 30 Vac/ac side switching/full wave 60 Vac/ac side switching/half wave Tor-Ac 30 Vac/ac side switching/full wave Tor-Ac 30 Vac/ac side switching/full wave/ With air gap shim 30 Vac connected across motor quickset/quickrelease/with air gap shim side switching 30 Vac/ac side switching/full wave 60 Vac/ac side switching/half wave

102 Conversions English-Metric Conversion Factors Multiply the base unit by the factor shown to obtain the desired conversion. Measurement Base Unit Factor Conversion Length inch, in (millimeter, mm) (millimeter, mm) inch, in pound-feet, lb-ft (newton-meter, Nm) pound-inch, lb-in (newton-meter, Nm) ounce-inch, oz-in (newton-meter, Nm) (newton-meter, Nm) pound-feet, lb-ft (newton-meter, Nm) pound-inch, lb-in (newton-meter, Nm) ounce-inch, oz-in Moment of Inertia pound-feet squared, lb-ft² (kilogram-meter squared, kgm²) (kilogram-meter squared, kgm²) pound-feet squared, lb-ft² Kinetic Energy foot-pound, ft-lb (joule, J) (joule, J) foot-pound, ft-lb Weight pound, lb (kilogram, kg) (kilogram, kg) pound, lb Horsepower (English) horsepower, hp (kilowatt, kw) (kilowatt, Kw) horsepower, hp Thermal Capacity horsepower-seconds per minute, hp-sec/min (watts, W) (watts W) horsepower-seconds per minute, hp-sec/min Temperature degrees Fahrenheit, F (degrees Celsius, C) ( F 3) x 5 /9 ( C x 9 /5) + 3 (degrees Celsius, C) degrees Fahrenheit, F English-English Conversion Factors for Thermal Capacity Base Unit horsepower ft-lb/sec ft-lb/min in-lb/sec in-lb/min Multiply by To Obtain hp-sec/min hp-sec/min hp-sec/min hp-sec/min hp-sec/min Decimal Equivalents of Fractions Decimal Equivalent (Inches) -Place 3-Place Fraction (Inches) Decimal Equivalent (Inches) -Place 3-Place Fraction (Inches) Decimal Equivalent (Inches) -Place 3-Place Fraction (Inches) /6 /3 3 /6 /6 5 /6 3 /3 7 /6 /8 9 /6 5 /3 /6 3 /6 3 /6 7 /3 /6 / 7 /6 9 /3 9 /6 5 /6 /6 /3 3 /6 3 / /6 3 /3 7 /6 7 /6 9 /6 /3 3 /6 / 33 /6 7 /3 35 /6 9 /6 37 /6 9 /3 39 /6 5 /8 /6 /3 3 /6 /6 5 /6 3 /3 7 /6 3 / /6 5 /3 5 /6 3 /6 53 /6 7 /3 55 /6 7 /8 57 /6 9 /3 59 /6 /6 6 /6 3 /3 63 /6 0

103 SINP Switches: Brief Operating Description For over 75 years, single-phase motors have utilized a mechanical centrifugal switch to switch the start circuit. Inherent characteristics of a mechanical device have made these switches prone to various problems, including tolerances, tolerance buildups, mechanical fatigue, vibration and a host of others that can lead to switch failures and/or performance inconsistency. Our challenge was to design a reliable solid-state switch to replace the mechanical switch and actuator mechanism, and duplicate the function of connecting and disconnecting the start circuit at particular speeds with the additional benefits of a solid-state device. After considerable research, we decided a successful electronic motor starting switch could be created by sensing the voltages present in the main and start windings. Until the rotor of a single-phase motor begins to rotate, there is no coupling between its start winding and main winding. When the rotor begins to turn, the main winding induces flux in the rotor, which then induces a voltage in the start winding. The voltage induced in the start winding is directly proportional to motor speed. Mounting Options In Stearns SINP Electronic Switches, the voltage across a motor s main winding and the voltage across its start winding are sampled and fed to a comparator. The logic circuitry is designed so that the electronic switch interrupts the start circuit current after the motor has accelerated to the speed at which cut out voltage is developed, generally 75 to 80% of synchronous motor speed. The logic circuitry then shuts down the switch s power stage, which consists of a triac or inverse parallel SCR s. This function is referred to as cut out. When the start circuit is disconnected, the main winding field then drives the motor s rotor to its running speed. If the motor encounters an overload, and the motor speed falls to approximately % of its synchronous speed, the SINP Switch automatically reconnects the motor s start circuit. This function is referred to as cut in. Cut in detection circuitry constantly monitors start winding voltage. When the motor s speed falls to the cut in point, the detection circuit causes the control logic to energize the SINP Switch s power output stage. The motor then goes through its normal startup procedure, with the start circuit being switched out at a motor speed approximately 75 to 80% of synchronous speed. SINP Switches are potted and completely sealed, making it impervious to dust, dirt and moisture. The unique speed sensing circuit provides a universal design which allows a few switches to work on most standard motor designs regardless of manufacturer. Acceptance by Motor Manufacturers US and foreign motor manufacturers have tested and retested the SINP Switch for reliability and quality. Today, many of these manufacturers have begun installing SINP Switches on their standard motor lines with more companies ready to make the changeover. UL Recognition Most SINP Switches have already been recognized C-UR-US under the Component Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (E-7). In addition, all switches have internal surge protection which is tested according to ANSI/IEEE C6. 99 Category A3. 03

104 Sinpac Design Features ƒ Typical Applications Stearns SINP Switches are ideal for applications requiring reliable switching of the start circuit in singlephase motors. Mechanical switches are prone to various problems including mechanical fatigue, tolerances, tolerance build-ups and vibration which can lead to performance inconsistency. Electronic SINP Switches solve all those problems which reduce production downtime in hundreds of applications. Some of these applications are illustrated below: Electrically Protected. Designed to filter out electrical noise, so there is no concern of random switch malfunction. Reduced Installation Time. Easy accessible / inch terminals and mounting, reduce the amount of time required to install SINP Switches or to change out mechanical switches. ƒ Restart Capability. When motor speed drops below % of synchronous speed, the start winding is brought back into the circuit to reinitiate starting torque. Soldered Heat Sink. High cycling. Transient Protection. Transient protection tested per ANSI/IEEE C Category A3. Universal Design. /60 Hz operation. Will work on, or 6 pole motors of any manufacturer. Reduced inventory. Line Voltage Compensation. No modifications or changes are required for line voltage variations. SINP Switches will operate in areas susceptible to brown-outs or low voltage due to long wiring runs. ADDITIONAL FEATURES Operating Temperature: -0 C to 65 C (-0 F to 9 F) [for operation between 65 C and 85 C (9 F and 85 F), consult factory.] Operating Voltage: Vac SINP Switch: Vac. For dual voltage motor equipped with center-tapped main winding: Vac or Vac. 30 Vac SINP Switch: Vac. Some additional applications include: Grain Dryers /60 Hz Water Equipment Paint Sprayers Power Tools Pressure Sprayers Commercial Dryers Vibrators Commercial Washing Machines Auger Drives Ice Makers Door Openers Gas Pumps Sump Pumps Floor Washers Diaphragm Pumps Bottle Washing Machines Hermetic Motors Floor Sanders Rotary Compressors Poultry Feeding Systems Refrigeration Compressors Fans, Blowers Grinding Machines Heat Pumps Milking Machines Jet Pumps Winches Food Processing Gate lifts Hoists Air compressors Door and partition systems Swimming pool pump motors 0 Submersible pumps Vacuum pumps

105 SINP Switches: Selection Motor hp ratings are typical. For an accurate selection procedure, measure start winding current during a normal start or at locked rotor and select a SINP Switch with higher maximum current rating than that measured.. Be sure switch series matches motor type.. Be sure switch voltage rating matches (start) circuit voltage rating. 3. Selection can be based on actual measurement of start winding current ortwo times the motor nameplate FLA rating.. Switch current rating must match or exceed the motor start winding current requirements. Always select a SINP Switch with the next higher current rating for: a) High cycling applications. b) Long acceleration time. c) High ambients: Greater than 55 C. 5. To assure proper motor operation, the voltage across the start winding must reach the SINP Switch cut out reference voltage between 70% to 85% of motors synchronous speed. Caution: SINP Switches are line voltage compensated. Changes in the line voltage will not effect system operation unless an overload condition causes reduced running speed, along with reduced voltage across the start winding. 6. Higher current switches can be used in place of lower rated switches of the same series. SINP Electronic Switch Catalog Numbering System CV 6 65 Start Winding Voltage Cut Out Voltage blank =, = 30 Maximum Current Rating Series CV - Capacitor Start Only, VR = Capacitor Start/Capacitor Run Only, IR = Capacitor Start Instant Reverse Electronics 7 = SINP Switch = CV Series - Capacitor Start Only 3 = Made-To-Order (MTO)* 5 = IR Series - Capacitor Start Only 7 = VR Series - Capacitor Start/ Capacitor Run Only = Start Circuit Voltage = 30 Start Circuit Voltage 0 = Standard A = Inductor Amps (max. current) 6, 5, 35, 0, 7 06 U03 3 = Standard, K = Kit V SINP Switch A = 30 VCO, B = 7 VCO, 0 = 65 VCO D = 80 VCO L = 30 VCO VCI V = 0 VCO 30 V SINP Switch C = 60 VCO, 0 = 30 VCO, E = 0 VCO M = 30 VCO, S = 3 VCO U = UL Recognized, N = Not UL Package Style = Metal Can.8 x.38 x.8 = Metal Can.67 x.78 x.86 = Capacitor Case.8 dia. x 3.37 long *NOTE: For part numbers beginning with 73 (these are OEM specials), the remaining digits of this numbering system do not apply. 05

106 SINP Switches: Line Voltage Compensation Charts CV, VR, and IR Series Induced voltage across the start winding is directly proportional to motor speed and line voltage. All SINP Switches use this voltage to switch the start capacitor out of the circuit. Your motor with a SINP Switch must generate a voltage that is 0% greater than the switch cut out voltage to assure cut out of the start capacitor. Refer to charts below CV and VR Line Voltage Cut Out Voltage CV and VR /60 Hz, Typical Start Winding Volts Line Voltage , Cut In Voltage CV and VR /60 Hz, Typical Start Winding Volts CV and VR Line Voltage V 30V 00 Cut Out Voltage CV, VR, CVR /60 Hz, Typical Start (Auxiliary) Winding Volts Line Voltage V, 30V 00 Cut In Voltage CV, VR, CVR /60 Hz, Typical Start (Auxiliary) Winding Volts IR SERIES Line Voltage Cut Out Voltage IR /60 Hz, Typical Start Winding Volts Line Voltage Cut In Voltage 7 IR /60 Hz, Typical Start Winding Volts 06

107 CV Series for Vac or /30 Vac Dual Voltage Capacitor Start Motors Basic Operation Capacitor start motors require a method to extract speed data from the voltage across the motor start winding. By comparing the start winding RPM-sensitive voltage with the main input voltage (which serves as a reference voltage), the switch determines when the start circuit should be energized. The electronic switch interrupts the start circuit current after the motor has accelerated to the cut out speed, and reconnects the start circuit whenever the motor speed has fallen to cut in speed (usually about % of synchronous motor speed). Typical Maximum Motor hp / / / Typical Full Load Motor Nameplate Current Rating (amps) /30 Volts Volts 8 8/ 8 8/ 8 8/ Switch Rating and Permissible Maximum Start Capacitor Current (amps) Start Circuit Voltage Catalog Number CV-6-30 CV-6-7 CV-6-65 Part Number* UA UB U03 Cut Out Voltage Typical Cut In Voltage Typical Package Style /6 /6 / CV-5-30 CV-5-7 CV UA UB U /0 0/0 0/ CV-0-30 CV-0-7 CV UA UB U /.5 5/.5 5/.5 CV--30 CV--7 CV UA UB U *Specify package style in place of in part number. Wiring Diagram Catalog Number SINP Switch Rating Volt /60 Hz Motor Operation 30 Volt /60 Hz Motor Operation CV-6 CV-5 CV-0 CV- Connect to Capacitor Start Motors CS Start Capacitor, M Motor main winding, ST Motor start winding - Enclosure - Enclosure (-amp switch) - Gasket - Gasket 07

108 VR Series for Vac or /30 Vac Dual Voltage Capacitor Start/Capacitor Run Motors Basic Operation Capacitor start/capacitor run motors provide continuous voltage sensing information which can be used to extract speed data from the voltage across the motor start winding. By comparing this start winding RPM-sensitive voltage to the main input voltage (which serves as a reference voltage), the switch determines when the start circuit should be de-energized. The electronic switch interrupts the start circuit current after the motor has accelerated to the cut out voltage (speed), and reconnects the start circuit whenever the speed sensitive circuit senses the motor voltage (speed) has decreased to a preselected cut in voltage (RPM) level. Capacitor start/capacitor run motors exhibit current transients and higher voltages across the start switch. These electrical stresses occur due to the switching of the two capacitors (start and run) that are connected in parallel during motor start and may have different voltages at time of restart. These stresses occur at restart with both mechanical and electronic start switches. The VR switch features circuitry designed to eliminate the effects of these conditions. Typical Maximum Motor hp Typical Full Load Motor Nameplate Current Rating (amps) Volts /30 Volts Switch Rating and Permissible Maximum Start Capacitor Current (amps) Start Circuit Voltage Catalog Number Part Number Cut Out Voltage Typical Cut In Voltage Typical Package Style / / / / 8/ 8/ VR-6-30 VR-6-7 VR UA UB U /0 0/0 0/ VR-0-30 VR-0-7 VR UA UB U /5 /5 /5 VR--30 VR--7 VR UA UB U Enclosure Dimensions are for estimating only. Drawings for customer reference are available upon request. Wiring Diagram Catalog Number SINP Switch Rating Volt /60 Hz Motor Operation 30 Volt /60 Hz Motor Operation Gasket VR-6 VR-0 VR- Connect to Capacitor Start/ Capacitor Run Motors 08

109 CV Series for 30 Vac Capacitor Start Motors VR Series for 30 Vac Capacitor Start/Capacitor Run Motors Basic Operation Capacitor start/capacitor run motors and capacitor start motors provide continuous voltage sensing information which can be used to extract speed data from the voltage across the motor start (auxiliary) winding. By comparing this start (auxiliary) winding RPM-sensitive voltage to the main input voltage (which serves as a reference voltage), the switch determines when the start circuit should be de-energized. The electronic switch interrupts the start circuit current after the motor has accelerated to the cut out speed, and reconnects the start circuit whenever the motor speed has decreased to a preselected cut in RPM level. Capacitor start/capacitor run motors exhibit current transients and higher voltages across the start switch. This electrical stress is due to the voltage differential which may exist between the start and run capacitors at the instant of switch closure. This stress phenomenon occurs with both mechanical and electronic type start switches. SINP Switches have voltage detection circuitry to minimize the effects of these conditions. Motor Type Capacitor start only Capacitor start only Capactitor start capacitor run Capactitor start capacitor run Typical Full Load Typical Motor Nameplate Max. Current Rating (amps) Motor hp Volts 30 Volts Switch Rating and Permissible Maximum Start Capacitor Current (amps) Start Circuit Voltage Catalog Number CV CV CV--60 CV--30 VR VR VR--60 VR--30 Part Number UC U UC U UC U UC U0 Cut Out Voltage Typical Cut In Voltage Typical Package Style Wiring Diagram Catalog Number SINP Switch Rating Volt /60 Hz Motor Operation 30 Volt /60 Hz Motor Operation CV Connect to Capacitor Start Motors 30 Volts Not Applicable VR Connect to Capacitor Start/ Capacitor Run Motors Not Applicable C S Start capacitor, M Motor main winding, C R Run capacitor, ST Motor start winding - Enclosure End view - Dimensions are for estimating only. Drawings for customer reference are available upon request. 09

110 IR Series for Instant Reversing Vac or /30 Vac Dual Voltage Capacitor Start Motors Basic Operation Bidirectional motors - those that can rotate in either direction are of two classes:. Reversing motors, which can change from full speed in one direction to full speed in the opposite direction.. Reversible motors, which can be reversed only when the motor is not running, or is running below cut out speed. Some motor manufacturers distinguish between quick reversing and instant reversing. A quick reversing motor requires a time delay of approximately /5th of a second or more for the switching circuitry to react. An instant reversing motor requires absolutely no time delay. The standard SINP Switch can be used on reversible and reversing motors. The SINP IR Series Switch provides the function of a direction sensing centrifugal switch and makes a reversible capacitor start motor into an instant reversing motor. In order to reverse a single-phase motor, it is necessary to reverse the polarity of either the start or main winding, but not both at the same time. The reversal of the winding is accomplished with an external reversing switch or contactor that is not part of the SINP Switch. SINP Instant Reverse Switch is not dependent upon how quickly the user operates the reversing switch, but only that the reversing switch did change states, i.e., forward to reverse, or vice versa. The SINP Switch detects the change in the phase shift between the main and start windings, and the logic circuit instantly actuates the starting switch, causing the start circuit to be reconnected to line voltage. This connection causes the motor to decelerate and then reaccelerate in the opposite direction. The SINP IR Series Switch interrupts the start circuit current after the motor has accelerated to the cut out speed, and reconnects the start circuit whenever the circuit senses the motor speed has fallen to cut in speed (usually about % of synchronous motor speed). Typical Maximum Motor hp Typical Full Load Motor Nameplate Current Rating (amps) Volts /30 Volts /6 /6 /6 0/0 0/0 0/0 Switch Rating and Permissible Maximum Start Capacitor Current (amps) Start Circuit Voltage Catalog Number Part Number Cut Out Voltage Typical Cut In Voltage Typical Package Style / / / IR-5-30 IR-5-7 IR-5-65 IR-0-30 IR-0-7 IR UA UB U UA UB U Contact factory on IVR series for capacitor start/capacitor run motors. Wiring Diagram Catalog Number SINP Switch Rating Volt /60 Hz Motor Operation 30 Volt /60 Hz Motor Operation Volt Operation Dual Voltage Motor Using Two Full Voltage or 3 Pole Single-Phase Reversing Contactors with Mechanical Interlock (Electrical Interlock Optional) 30 Volt Operation Dual Voltage Motor Using Two Full Voltage or 3 Pole Single-Phase Reversing Contactors with Mechanical Interlock (Electrical Interlock Optional) IR-5 IR-0 Connect to Instant Reverse Start Motors Volts Dimensions are for estimating only. Drawings for customer reference are available upon request. Reversing contacts are not part of SINP Switch. Reversing contacts are not part of SINP Switch. Drum switch is not part of SINP Switch. Reversing contacts are not part of SINP Switch. C S Start capacitor, M Motor main winding, ST Motor start winding, F Forward, R Reverse 0

111 TENV/IP5 Super-Mod Clutch-Brake Modules Imagine a totally-enclosed, nonventilated clutch-brake ready to work right out of the box, requiring no modifications. And at a price competitive with open enclosure clutch-brakes. TENV Super-Mod will give you extended cycles, enhanced operating efficiency and longer operating life. TENV Super-Mod Modules are well suited for challenging applications where water, moisture, dirt, dust and other airborne pollutants can shorten the life of traditional clutch-brakes. Examine these key value-added features: Cast-aluminum housing that meets IP5 requirements, preventing moisture and dirt from affecting operation of the unit Integrally cast, clutch-side magnetic body and endbell provides large heat sink that conducts heat away from coil Brake-side magnetic body integrated with cast housing creates a heat exchanger that keeps the brake coil cool Unique fan design creates bidirectional air movement within the unit. This stabilizes internal temperatures and eliminates hot spots. The fan is cast into the drive hub and is equally efficient at moving air axially through the housing during motor rotation in either direction Depending on the model, between 8 and 60 percent fewer parts than competitive units for enhanced reliability and service life Armature assembly features an automatic gap adjustment that maintains a consistent de-energized armature-to-friction-face air gap Completely gasketed conduit box resists moisture and spray Washdown (IP55) availability in select models For even better performance, include an optional Tor-ac rectifier for or 30 Vac input. Tor-ac rectifiers connect directly to the power source for switching on the -side. This eliminates contact arcing, improving the life of associated switching components while providing you with mechanical response times comparable to -side switching. The Stearns TENV Super-Mod Module comes in a wide range of popular sizes with nominal static torque ratings from 6 and lb-ft. Each unit is designed as an exact drop-in replacement, so you can upgrade today or at your next regularly scheduled maintenance shutdown. Stearns Super-Mod Totally-Enclosed Non-Ventilated (TENV) Modules Featuring Internal components shown are for SM only. Standard conduit box has gaskets to protect against moisture Rugged TENV/IP5 cast-aluminum enclosure Precision sealed ball bearings Grooved shaft key Machined C-face and C-face registers Class H insulation materials Operating range - 0 thru 0 F Optional Tor-ac Rectifier(s) Integral clutch magnet body serves as a large heat sink for heat dissipation Non-asbestos friction linings Exclusive bi-directional integral fan circulates air internally which eliminates hot spots inside the enclosure Input adapter kit delivers flexibility to change configurations Brake magnet body cast into aluminum housing creates an efficient heat sink to conduct heat away from brake coil Optional cast-aluminum base kit does not restrict use of C-face and C-face register

112 Super-Mod Clutch-Brake Modules How To Select The Proper Unit For Your Application C-face mounted motor brake module (0MB) Foot/base mounting of clutch-brake or clutch module (030B or 300B) st Select the appropriate configuration based on the relationship with the motor, gearbox and drive components. C-face mounted brake, clutch or clutch-brake module (0, 00 or 00) C-face mounted brake, clutch, or clutch-brake module. Mounted between motor and gearbox (0, 00, or 00) nd Determine if the application requires clutching only, braking only or a clutchbrake combination. Clutch Only Provides a start and/or continuous motion until the control logic disengages (removes the power or voltage from the unit s coil). NOTE: The load will coast since no braking action is provided. Brake Only Provides a stop and hold, typically of a motor shaft, until the control logic disengages (removes the power or voltage from the unit s coil). Clutch-Brake Provides a start-stop motion used for cycling, intermediate or random motion and controls a load or machine element. Both the clutch and brake coils are electrically engaged (power on), however, the control logic should not signal both coils to be engaged at the same time. 3 rd Select the proper size/torque rating based on horsepower and RPM (speed at the clutch or brake) using the Super-Mod Selection Chart to the right. Based on.75 service factor. For other service factors and speeds, use the formulas shown to the far right. CAUTION: RPM refers to shaft speed at clutch or brake. Note: Frame size and shaft diameter may affect selection and should be considered. See manufacturer s dimensional and sizing information. Super-Mod Selection Chart RPM x HP /8 / /3 / 3/ / / SM- SM-00/80 SM-0 SM- Where: T d = Average dynamic torque, lb-ft P = Horsepower, HP N = Shaft speed differential at clutch and/or brake components, RPM SF = Service factor 55 = Constant th Ensure that the unit can properly dissipate the heat generated by the application. Thermal capacity can be calculated as follows: E Where: = Energy (heat) which needs to be dissipated in foot pounds per minute (ft-lb/min) for the application requirement. WR = Total reflected inertia at clutch-brake shaft location. This should include clutch-brake inertia. Inertia (lb-ft ) SM, 00, 80 SM 0, Clutch/Brake Clutch Only Brake Only th Options 5 Select any other options you may require. Tor-ac Kit Adapter Kit Single-channel, solid-state, quick-response An input adapter kit can be stocked which rectifier circuit can be mounted in any SM unit gives you immediate flexibility to modify to which allows you to switch on the -side with double shafted configurations. See page mechanical response times comparable to for ordering and dimensional information. traditional -side switching. N = Speed differential in revolutions per minute at the clutch-brake shaft. F = Number of cycles per minute (cycle rate) The thermal capacity requirements calculated should be compared to the thermal capacity ratings. Exceeding this rating could cause overheating and possible failure. SM can accommodate 5,000 ft-lb/min; SM-0 7,000 ft-lb/min; and SM- 5,600 ft-lb/min. Base Kit A base kit can be added to clutch only (00) or clutch-brake (00) units. See page 6 for ordering and dimensional information. Special Applications which is in excess of the unit s capability to Fully neoprene gasketed with BISSC 6 th dissipate. The thermal capacity requirement approved white epoxy paint. Low Speed equation should be used to size the clutch and/or brake for this type of application. High Soft Starts And/Or Stops Application of clutches and brakes at speeds cycle rates may also require special highspeed controls. of 300 RPM or less may not permit sufficient While the Stearns Gap feature is desirable in burnishing or run-in to occur, the result being most applications, there are some situations reduced and erratic torque output. For these Washdown where it should be disabled, such as very soft applications, we suggest using a unit which For applications requiring regular washdown, starts and/or stops achieved with low voltage has a static torque rating of at least two times such as food processing or other wet, highhumidity environments use the Super-Mod the voltage will be varied to below 75% of the energizing of the coil. For applications where the calculated torque requirement. High Cycle Rates Applications where high cycle rates are TENV Washdown Clutch-Brake Modules. Models in most popular sizes with nominal coil rating, request that the Stearns Gap feature be disabled. required could result in heat being generated static torque ratings of 6 and 35 lb-ft.

113 Super-Mod Clutch-Brake Modules: SM-00, SM-00WD (Washdown) and SM-030B SM-00 SM-00WD SM-030B 56C through TC NEMA Frame Sizes 6 through lb-ft Static ; 00 Maximum RPM TENV Totally Enclosed (Non-Ventilated) IP-5 Enclosure Protection, (IP-55 for Washdown Units) Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., File E-7 and CSA Certified, File LR-65 Power-On Clutch and Brake* Engagement Maximum Overhung load capacity is 85 lbs Performance Data, Ordering Information and s (Discount Symbol -8) Static lb-ft Dynamic lb-ft NEMA Frame Hub bore and shaft diameter Model Part Number Thermal Capacity (ft-lb/min) Wt. (lbs) Maximum Electrical Power (watts) List Priceƒ C SM A*L $ C SM--00B B*L C SM--00WD A*L C SM C*L C 5/8 hub SM--030B D*L bore C 5/8 shaft SM A*L C SM-00-00B B*L C SM-00-00WD A*L C SM C*L C SM B D*L TC SM A*O TC 7/8 hub SM-80-00B B*O TC bore SM-80-00WD AJO TC 7/8 shaft SM C*O TC SM B D*O TC SM A*R TC -/8 hub SM-0-00B B*R bore 75 80TC -/8 shaft SM C*R TC SM-0-030B D*R TC SM A*U TC -3/8 hub SM--00B B*U bore 86 0TC -3/8 shaft SM C*U TC SM--030B D*U Thermal capacity rating is based on ambient temperature of 70 F at 7 RPM. ƒlist prices subject to change without notice. Voltage Table Options - Features Table Character Voltage List Adder Example of a complete part number: Series Character Description C Vdc AJL 5/8 hub SM-00 A Basic Unit - Direct Couple E -8 Vdc none Vdc J Vdc Basic unit SM-00B B Basic Unit Plus Base 0=Standard Unit N Vac $8.00 = Without Gap Adjust Basic Unit Plus Clutch Input SM-030 C P 30 Vac 0.00 Adapter Hub Size Table for SM-00 s Basic Unit Plus Base & Clutch Specials available upon request. SM-030B D Input Adapter Character Bore Keyway Consult factory for list price adder. SM-00WD IP-55 Washdown (available in NEMA frame sizes 56C-TC) L O R U *See Series 56,700 and 87,700 for power-off fail safe C-face coupler units 5 /8 7 /8 /8 3 /8 3 /6 x 3 /3 3 /6 x 3 /3 / x /8 5 /6 x 5 /3 3

114 Super-Mod Clutch Only Modules: SM-00, SM-00WD (Washdown) and SM-300B SM-00 SM-00WD SM-300B 56C through TC NEMA Frame Sizes 6 through lb-ft Static ; 00 Maximum RPM TENV Totally Enclosed (Non-Ventilated) IP-5 Enclosure Protection, (IP-55 for Washdown Units) Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., File E-7 and CSA Certified, File LR-65 Maximum overhung load capacity is 85 lbs Performance Data, Ordering Information and s (Discount Symbol -8) Static lb-ft Dynamic lb-ft NEMA Frame Hub bore and shaft diameter Model Part Number Thermal Capacity Wt. (ft-lb/min) (lbs) Maximum Electrical Power (watts) List Priceƒ C SM A*L $ C SM--00B B*L C SM--00WD A*L C SM C*L C 5/8 hub SM--300B D*L bore C 5/8 shaft SM A*L C SM-00-00B B*L C SM-00-00WD A*L C SM C*L C SM B D*L TC SM A*O TC 7/8 hub SM-80-00B B*O TC bore SM-80-00WD A*O TC 7/8 shaft SM C*O TC SM B D*O TC SM A*R TC -/8 hub SM-0-00B B*R bore 75 80TC -/8 shaft SM C*R TC SM-0-300B D*R TC SM A*U TC -3/8 hub SM--00B B*U bore 86 0TC -3/8 shaft SM C*U TC SM--300B D*U Thermal capacity rating is based on ambient temperature of 70 F at 7 RPM. Voltage Table ƒ List prices subject to change without notice. Character Voltage List Adder Options - Features Table C Vdc Example of a complete part number: Series Character Description E -8 Vdc none AJL 5 /8 hub SM-00 A Basic Unit - Direct Couple J Vdc Vdc N Vac $ 9.00 Basic unit SM-00B B Basic Unit Plus Base 0=Standard Unit P 30 Vac 0.00 Basic Unit Plus Clutch Input = Without Gap Adjust SM-300 C Adapter Hub Size Table for SM-00 s Basic Unit Plus Base & Clutch Character Bore Keyway SM-300B D Specials available upon request. Input Adapter Consult factory for list price adder. SM-00WD IP-55 Washdown (available in NEMA frame sizes 56C-TC) L O R U 5 /8 7 /8 /8 3 /8 3/6 x 3/3 3/6 x 3 /3 / x /8 5 /6 x 5 /3

115 Super-Mod Brake Only Modules: SM-0, SM-0WD (Washdown) and SM-0MB SM-0 SM-0WD SM-0MB 56C through TC NEMA Frame Sizes 6 through lb-ft Static ; 00 Maximum RPM TENV Totally Enclosed (Non-Ventilated) IP-5 Enclosure Protection, (IP-55 for Washdown Units) Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., File E-7 and CSA Certified, File LR-65 Power-On Brake* Engagement Maximum overhung load capacity is 85 lbs. *See Series 56,700 and 87,700 for power-off fail safe C-face coupler units Performance Data, Ordering Information and s (Discount Symbol -8) Static lb-ft Dynamic lb-ft NEMA Frame Hub bore and shaft diameter Example of a complete part number: AJL 5/8 hub Vdc Basic unit 0=Standard Unit = Without Gap Adjust Model Part Number Thermal Capacity (ft-lb/min) Wt. (lbs) Maximum Electrical Power (watts) List Priceƒ C SM A*L 00 9 $ C SM--0WD A*L C 5/8 hub SM--0MB *L bore C 5/8 shaft SM A*L C SM-00-0WD A*L C SM-00-0MB *L TC 7/8 hub SM A*O TC bore SM-80-0WD A*O TC 7/8 shaft SM-80-0MB *O TC -/8 hub SM A*R bore 75 80TC -/8 shaft SM-0-0MB *R TC -3/8 hub SM A*U bore 86 0TC -3/8 shaft SM--0MB *U Thermal capacity rating is based on ambient temperature of 70 F at 7 RPM. ƒ List prices subject to change without notice. Specials available upon request. Consult factory for list price adder. Options - Features Table Series Character Description SM-0 A Basic Unit - Coupler SM-0MB SM-0WB No Shaft (end mount motor brake) IP-55 Washdown (available in NEMA frame sizes 56C-TC) Voltage Table Character Voltage C Vdc E -8 Vdc J Vdc N Vac P 30 Vac Hub Size Table for SM-0 s Character Bore L O R U 5 /8 7 /8 /8 3 /8 List Adder none $ Keyway 3/6 x 3/3 3/6 x 3 /3 / x /8 5 /6 x 5 /3

116 Super-Mod Conversion Kits Mechanical Flexibility through Conversion Kits Super-Mod provides the answer with inexpensive, easy to use, stock conversion kits. Stock either the base kit, adapter kit, Tor-ac kit or all of them and you can quickly modify your standard clutch (00), or clutch-brake (00) into almost any configuration (030TB, 300B for example). Super-Mod is an innovative product. When combined with your equipment, it provides added value through increased reliability and reduced inventory. Base Kit Dimensional Data (In Inches) Base Kits Cannot Be Used On Brake Only (0 and 0MB) Series SM-/00B SM-80B SM-0/B A B C D E F G H L W Bolt Size 3 /8-6x 3 / hex head 3/8-6x 3 / hex head 3 /8-6x socket head Input Adapter Kit (For use with Super-Mod only) Dimensional Data (In Inches) Series SM-80A SM-0A SM-A AK SM-/00A /.6 A B..8. C.875/ / /.37 Keyway SL 3 /6 x 3 / /6 x 3 /6 / x / 5 /6 x 5 / Ordering Information and s Catalog Number Base Kits (Base Kits Cannot Be Used On Brake Only - 0 and 0MB) SM-/00B SM-80B SM-0B Input Adapter Kits SM-/00A SM-80A SM-0A SM-56A SM- and SM-00 Series SM-80 Series SM-0 and SM- Series SM- and SM-00 Series SM-80 Series SM-0 Series SM- Series Rectifiers Performance/ Data Catalog Number Part Number Part Number Input Voltage Use with Vdc J coils only. Based on ambient temperature of 9 F. ƒlist prices subject to change without notice. Option Adder $ Nominal Output Volts Max. Amps Max. Watts List Price ƒ Discount Symbol Discount Symbol SM-Tor-ac SBC K -60 Hz $ SM-Tor-ac SBC K Hz SM Tor-ac Kit Single channel, solid-state, quick response rectifier circuit can be mounted in any SM unit. Lets you switch on the -side, with mechanical response times equal to traditional -side switching.

117 Super-Mod Dimensional Data SM-00, SM-00, SM-0 and SM-0MB NEMA C-Face Frame Size Configuration Basic Module Style Basic Model Number AJ AK Hub Bore and Shaft Ø Keyway A B C D E P T U V C-Face Clutch/Brake A*L SM- SM-00 56C 5/8 hub bore 5/8 shaft C-Face Clutch Only A*L /8 3/6 x 3/3 6.9 C-Face Brake Only A*L C-Face Brake Only 0MB *L without Shaft C-Face Clutch/Brake A*O SM-80 TC 7/8 hub bore 7/8 shaft C-Face Clutch Only A*O /8 3/6 x 3/3 6.9 C-Face Brake Only A*O C-Face Brake Only 0MB *O without Shaft C-Face Clutch/Brake A*R SM-0 8TC 8TC -/8 hub bore -/8 shaft C-Face Clutch Only A*R /8 / x /8 9 C-Face Brake Only A*R 7..6 C-Face Brake Only 0MB *R without Shaft C-Face Clutch/Brake A*U SM- 3TC TC -3/8 hub bore -3/8 shaft C-Face Clutch Only A*U /8 5/6 x 5/3 9 C-Face Brake Only A*U C-Face Brake Only 0MB *U without Shaft

118 Super-Mod Dimensional Data SM-030B and SM-300B NEMA C-Face Frame Size SM SM00 56C 5/8 shaft SM-80 3TC TC 7/8 shaft SM-0 8TC 8TC -/8 shaft SM- 3TC TC -3/8 shaft Configuration Base Mount Clutch/Brake- Double Shaft Base Mount Clutch Only- Double Shaft Base Mount Clutch/Brake- Double Shaft Base Mount Clutch Only- Double Shaft Base Mount Clutch/Brake- Double Shaft Base Mount Clutch Only- Double Shaft Base Mount Clutch/Brake- Double Shaft Base Mount Clutch Only- Double Shaft Basic Module Style Basic Model Number Shaft ø 030B D*L 5/8 300B D*L 5/8 030B D*O 7/8 300B D*O 7/8 030B D*R -/8 300B D*R -/8 Keyway B D E F G H I J K M N O T U V 3/6 x 3/3 3/6 x 3/3 3/6 x 3/3 3/6 x 3/3 / x /8 / x /8 030B D*U -3/8 5/6 x 5/3 300B D*U -3/8 5/6 x 5/

119 Application Engineering Introduction Information and guidelines provided in the application section are intended for general selection and application of spring set brakes. Unusual operating environments, loading or other undefined factors may affect the proper application of the product. Stearns application services are available to assist in proper selection or to review applications where the specifier may have questions. A spring set brake is used to stop and hold a rotating shaft. Generally the brake is mounted to an electric motor, but can also be mounted to gear reducers, hoists, machinery or utilize a foot mount kit. The brake should be located on the high speed shaft of a power transmission system. This permits a brake with the lowest possible torque to be selected for the system. Spring set disc brakes use friction to stop (dynamic torque) and hold (static torque) a load. Energy of the motor rotor and moving load is converted to thermal energy (heat) in the brake during deceleration. The brakes are power released, spring applied. No electrical current is required to maintain the spring set condition. The system designer will need to consider the mount surface and match the brake to the load and application. Factors include: brake torque, stopping time, deceleration rate, load weight and speed, location and environment. Brake thermal ratings, electrical requirements and environmental factors are discussed in separate sections. Electrical Considerations Solenoid actuated brakes (SAB s) are available with standard motor voltages, frequencies and Class B or H coil insulation. Most models can be furnished with either single or dual voltage coils. Coils in most models are field replaceable. Inrush and holding amperage information is published for the common coil voltages and factory available for other voltages or frequencies. Amperage information for specific coil sizes is provided for selection of wire size and circuit protection at brake installation. Fixed voltage - /60 Hz dual frequency coils are available in many models. All SAB coils are single phase and can be wired to either single or three phase motors without modifications. All solenoid coils have a voltage range of +/- 0% of the rated nameplate voltage at the rated frequency. Instantaneous rated voltage must be supplied to the coil to insure proper solenoid pull in and maximum coil cycle rate. The plunger rapidly seats in the solenoid and the amperage requirements drops to a holding amperage value. Instantaneous voltage must be supplied to the coil to insure proper solenoid pull-in and maximum coil cycle rate. Because Stearns Solenoid Actuated Brakes (SAB s) require low current to maintain the brake in the released position, the response time to set the brake can be affected by EMF voltages generated by the motor windings. It may be necessary to isolate the brake coil from the motor winding. The solenoid coil cycle rate limits the engagements per minute of a static or holding duty brake. Brake thermal performance, discussed in another section, limits engagements per minute in dynamic applications. Class B insulation is standard in most SAB models, class H coil insulation is optional and is recommended for environments above 0 F (0 C), or rapid cycling applications. Armature actuated brakes (AAB s) are available in standard voltages. Available rectification is listed in the catalog section. Wattage information is provided in the catalog pages. Unlike solenoid actuated brakes, armature actuated brakes do not have inrush amperage. Coil and armature reaction time and resulting torque response time information is available. Like SAB, mechanical reaction time depends on typical application factors including load, speed and position. Electrical response time and profiles are unique to the SAB and AAB. Reaction time requirements should be considered when selecting or interchanging brakes. All Stearns brake coils are rated for continuous duty and can be energized continually without overheating. The coil heating effect is greatest at coil engagement due to engaging, pull in or inrush amperage. Temperature limits as established by UL controls standards are: Class A insulation F (05 C) Class B insulation 66 F (30 C) Class H insulation 356 F (80 C). Types of Applications In order to simplify the selection of a disc brake, loads can be classified into two categories, non-overhauling and overhauling. Loads are classified as non overhauling, if () no components of the connected equipment or external material undergo a change of height, such as would occur in hoisting, elevating or lowering a load, and () there is only rotary motion in a horizontal plane. For example, a loaded conveyor operating in a horizontal plane would be typical of a non-overhauling load. If the same conveyor were transporting material to a lower level, it would be classified as an overhauling load. The external material or load undergoes a change in height, with the weight of the load attempting to force the conveyor to run faster than its design speed or to overhaul. Non-overhauling loads require braking torque only to stop the load and will remain at rest due to system friction. Overhauling loads, such as a crane hoist, have two torque requirements. The first requirement is the braking torque required to stop the load, and the second requirement is the torque required to hold the load at rest. The sum of these requirements is considered when selecting a brake for an overhauling load. Alignment Requirements per NEMA: Permissible ECCENTRICITY of mounting rabbet (AK dimension): C to 86TC frames inclusive is 0.00 total indicator reading. 3TC to 5TC frames inclusive is total indicator reading. Face Runout: C to 86TC frames inclusive is 0.00 total indicator reading. If a customer furnishes a face on the machine for brake mounting, the same tolerances apply. Floor mounted brakes must be carefully aligned within for concentricity and angular alignment. Use of dowels to insure permanent alignment is recommended. In offset brake mount locations such as fan covers, cowls or jack shafting, proper mount rigidity and bearing support must be provided. Spring set frictional brakes characteristically have a rapid stop during torque application which may affect the mount surface or contribute to shaft deflection. Printed installation information is published and available on all Stearns spring set brakes. Determining Brake ratings Brake torque ratings are normally expressed as nominal static torque. That is, the torque required to begin rotation of the brake from a static, engaged condition. This value is to be distinguished from dynamic torque, which is the retarding torque required to stop a linear, rotating or overhauling load. 9

120 As a general rule, a brake s dynamic torque is approximately 80% of the static torque rating of the brake for stopping time up to one second. Longer stopping time will produce additional brake heat and possible fading (reduction) of dynamic torque. The required dynamic torque must be converted to a static torque value before selecting a brake, using the relationship: All Stearns brakes are factory burnished and adjusted to produce no less than rated nominal static torque. Burnishing is the initial wear-in and mating of the rotating friction discs with the stationary metallic friction surfaces of the brake. Although brakes are factory burnished and adjusted, variations in torque may occur if components are mixed when disassembling and reassembling the brake during installation. Further burnishing may be necessary after installation. Friction material will burnish under normal load conditions. Brakes used as holding only duty require friction material burnishing at or before installation to insure adequate torque. When friction discs are replaced, the brake must be burnished again in order to produce its rated holding torque. System Friction The friction and rolling resistance in a power transmission system is usually neglected when selecting a brake. With the use of anti-friction bearings in the system, friction and rolling resistance is usually low enough to neglect. Friction within the system will assist the brake in stopping the load. If it is desired to consider it, subtract the frictional torque from the braking torque necessary to decelerate and stop the load. Friction and rolling resistance are neglected in the examples presented in this guide. Non-overhauling Loads There are two methods for determining brake torque for non-overhauling loads. The first method is to size the brake to the torque of the motor. The second is to select a brake on the basis of the total system or load inertia to be stopped. Selecting Brake from the Motor Data Motor full-load torque based or nameplate horsepower and speed can be used to select a brake. This is the most common method of selecting a brake torque rating due to its simplicity. This method is normally used for simple rotary and linear inertial loads. Brake torque is usually expressed as a percent of the full load torque of the motor. Generally this figure is not less than 00% of the motor s full load torque. Often a larger service factor is considered. Refer to Selection of Service Factor. The required brake torque may be calculated from the formula: Match the brake torque to the hp used in the application. When an oversized motor hp has been selected, brake torque based on the motor hp may be excessive for the actual end use. Nameplate torque represents a nominal static torque. will vary based on combinations of factors including cycle rate, environment, wear, disc burnish and flatness. Spring set brakes provide a rapid stop and hold and are generally not used in repeat positioning applications. Selection of Service Factor A service factor is applied to the basic drive torque calculation. The SF compensates for any tolerance variation, data inaccuracy, unplanned transient torque and potential variations of the friction disc. When using the basic equation: T= (hp x 55) / rpm with nonoverhauling loads, a service factor of. to. is typical. Overhauling loads with unknown factors such as reductions may use a service factor of. to.8. Spring set brakes combined with variable frequency drives use service factors ranging from.0 to.0 (.0 for holding duty only) depending on the system design. These holding duty brakes must be wired to a separate dedicated power supply. Occasionally, a brake with a torque rating less than the motor full load torque or with a service factor less than.0 is selected. These holding or soft stop applications must be evaluated by the end user or system designer to insure adequate sizing and thermal capacity. Typically a brake rated % of the motor full load torque, or with a.5 service factor, provides a stop in approximately the same time as that required for the motor to accelerate the load to full load speed. Occasionally a motor is oversized or undersized for the load or application. In these situations, the load inertia and desired stopping time calculations should be used rather than relying on the service factor method alone. Service factor selection can be based on motor performance curves. Motor rotor and load inertia should be considered in this selection process. Depending on the motor design (NEMA A, B, C and D), rpm and horsepower, the maximum torque is either the starting or breakdown torque. A NEMA design B, 3 phase, squirrel cage design motor at breakdown torque produces a minimum of % the full load torque. A service factor of.5 would be selected. Typical service factors depending on NEMA motor design are: NEMA design A or B:.75 to 3.0, NEMA design C:.75 to 3.0 and NEMA design D: not less than.75. A brake with an excessive service factor may result in system component damage, an unreasonably rapid stop or loss of load control. A SF above.0 is not recommended without evaluation by the end user or system designer. Example : Select brake torque from motor horsepower and speed. A brake having a standard rating of 5 lb-ft nominal static torque would be selected. Example illustrates selection of a brake to provide proper static torque to hold a load if dynamic braking were used to stop the load. Example : Select a brake to hold a load in position after some other method, such as dynamic braking of the motor, has stopped all rotation. Given: Weight of load (W) - 5 lb Drum radius (R) - ft Service factor (SF) -. 0

121 The static holding torque is determined by the weight of the load applied at the drum radius. A service factor is applied to ensure sufficient holding torque is available in the brake. Sizing the Brake to the Inertial Load For applications where the load data is known, where high inertial loads exist, or where a stop in a specified time or distance is required, the brake should be selected on the basis of the total inertia to be retarded. The total system inertia, reflected to the brake shaft speed, would be: Once the total system inertia is calculated, the required average dynamic braking torque can be calculated using the formula: The dynamic braking torque required to stop the total inertia in second is, Other significant system inertias, including speed reducers, shafting, pulleys and drums, should also be considered in determining the total inertia the brake would stop. If any component in the system has a rotational speed different than the rotational speed of the brake, or any linear moving loads are present, such as a conveyor load, their equivalent inertia in terms of rotary inertia at the brake rotational speed must be determined. The following formulas are applicable: Rotary motion: The calculated dynamic torque is converted to the static torque rating using the relationship: Examples 3,, 5 and 6 illustrate how brake torque is determined for nonoverhauling loads where rotary or horizontal linear motion is to be stopped. Example 3: Select a brake to stop a rotating flywheel in a specified time. A brake having a standard static torque rating of 35 lb-ft would be selected. Since a brake with more torque than necessary to stop the flywheel in second is selected, the stopping time would be, See section on Stopping Time and Thermal Information. Example : Select a brake to stop a rotating flywheel, driven through a gear reducer, in a specified time. First determine the total inertia to be stopped, Horizontal Linear Motion

122 The required dynamic torque to stop the conveyor load in 0.5 seconds can now be determined. See section on Stopping Time and Thermal Information. Example 5: Select a brake to stop a load on a horizontal belt conveyor in a specified time. Given: Converting dynamic torque to static torque, Next, the inertia of the flywheel must be reflected back to the motor brake shaft. A brake having a standard static torque rating of 6 lb-ft would be selected. See Thermal Information. Example 6: Select a brake to stop a trolley crane and its load in a specified time. Brake mounted on wheel axle. Given: The required dynamic torque to stop the flywheel in 0.5 seconds can now be determined. Converting dynamic torque to static torque, A brake having a standard static torque rating of 6 lb-ft would be selected. Since a brake with more torque than necessary to stop the flywheel in 0.5 seconds is selected, the stopping time would be, Next, determine inertia of load. Then, determine total inertial load The dynamic braking torque required to stop the trolley crane and load can be determined by one of two methods. The first method is to determine the equivalent inertia of the linearly moving crane and load, then calculate the dynamic braking torque. The second method is to determine the dynamic braking torque directly. Using the first method, the total weight to be stopped is determined first.

123 For both methods above, the required dynamic braking torque is converted to static torque, Third, the overhauling torque reflected to the brake shaft is determined by the formula: Then, the equivalent inertia of the linearly moving crane and load is determined. Finally, the dynamic braking torque required to stop the total inertia in seconds is, A smaller brake could be mounted on the high speed shaft in place of the higher torque on the low speed shaft. A brake having a standard static torque rating of 05 lb-ft is selected. Since a brake with more torque than necessary to stop the load in seconds is selected, the stopping time would be, Or alternately, the dynamic torque to overcome the overhauling load can be calculated with the formula: Using the second method, the dynamic braking torque required to stop the crane and load in seconds can be calculated directly using the formula, or, for this example, See section on Stopping Time and cycle rates, Thermal Selection. Stops should be under seconds. Longer stops require application test. Overhauling Loads Applications with a descending load, such as power lowered crane, hoist or elevator loads, require a brake with sufficient torque to both stop the load, and hold it at rest. Overhauling loads having been brought to rest still invite motion of the load due to the effect of gravity. Therefore, brake torque must be larger than the overhauling torque in order to stop and hold the load. If brake torque is equal to or less than the overhauling torque, there is no net torque available for stopping a descending load. First, the total system inertia reflected to the brake shaft speed must be calculated. Second, the average dynamic torque required to decelerate the descending load in the required time is calculated with the formula: Next, the total dynamic torque required to stop and hold the overhauling load is the sum of the two calculated dynamic torques: Finally, the dynamic torque must be converted to static brake torque to select a brake: 3

124 If the total inertia of the system and overhauling load cannot be accurately determined, a brake rated at 80% the motor full load torque should be selected. Refer to Selection of Service Factor. The motor starting torque may permit a heavier than rated load to be lifted; the brake must stop the load when descending. Examples 7, 8 and 9 illustrate how brake torque would be determined for overhauling loads. In these examples brakes are selected using the system data rather than sizing them to the motor. Refer to the section on Thermal Calculations to determine cycle rate. Consider motor slip in calculation. An 800 rpm motor with 0% slip would operate at,60 rpm when the load is ascending and,980 rpm when descending. Motor rpm, armature inertia and load position will affect stop time. Brakes on overhauling loads should be wired through a dedicated relay. Example 7: Select a brake to stop an overhauling load in a specified time. Now, the dynamic torque required to decelerate the load and drum in the required time is calculated. Next, calculate the dynamic torque required to overcome the overhauling load. The total dynamic torque to stop and hold the overhauling load is the sum of the two calculated dynamic torques. Wire the brake through a dedicated relay on overhauling loads where stop time or distance is critical. See section on Stopping time. Example 8: Select a brake to stop an overhauling load driven through gear reducer in a specified time. First, calculate all inertial loads reflected to the brakemotor shaft. Dynamic torque is then converted to static torque. The rotational speed of the drum is, A brake having a standard torque rating of lb-ft is selected based on expected stop time. Since a brake with more torque than necessary to stop the load in second is selected, the stopping time would be, From this, the cable speed can be determined. The equivalent inertia of the load reflected to the brakemotor shaft is, Then, determine the equivalent inertia of the overhauling load. Therefore, the total inertia at the brake is,

125 The equivalent inertia of the drum at the brakemotor shaft speed is, Finally, the total inertia the brake will retard is, From this the cable speed can be determined The dynamic torque required to decelerate the total inertia is, The equivalent inertia of the loaded bucket reflected to the brakemotor shaft is, Now, calculate the dynamic torque to overcome the overhauling load. Which reflected to the brakemotor shaft becomes, Next, the inertia of the pulley and drum are reflected to the brake motor shaft speed so the total inertia at the brake can be determined. Since the diameters of the pulley and drum are the same,.5 ft, their rotational speeds would be the same, 0.6 rpm. The inertia of the pulley reflected to the brakemotor shaft is, Then, the total dynamic torque to stop and hold the overhauling load is the sum of the two calculated dynamic torques. Dynamic torque is then converted to static torque. A brake having a standard torque rating of 5 lb-ft is selected. Example 9: Select a brake to stop and hold a load on an inclined plane (skip hoist). Required stopping time (t) - sec The bucket is full when ascending the track and is empty when descending. When selecting a brake the most severe condition would be a fully loaded bucket backed down the hoist track. In normal operation the descending bucket would be empty. In this example, the brake is selected for the most severe condition. The total torque to stop and hold the bucket and load when descending is the sum of (a) the torque to decelerate the total inertia and (b) the torque required to hold the loaded bucket. First, calculate all inertial loads reflected to the brakemotor shaft. The rotational speed of the drum is: The inertia of the drum reflected to the brakemotor shaft is, The total inertia to be stopped is, Then, the dynamic torque required to bring the descending bucket and load to rest is,

126 The additional dynamic torque required to hold the overhauling load would be determined by the unbalanced component of the force acting along the plane of the hoist track, W T sinb, and the length of the moment arm which is the drum radius (R D ). W T sinb is the force necessary to retard downward motion of the loaded hoist bucket. Which reflected to the brakemotor shaft becomes, Then, the total dynamic torque to stop and hold the descending bucket and load is the sum of the two calculated dynamic torques. Converting to static torque, A brake having a standard torque rating of lb-ft is selected. Since a brake with more torque than necessary to stop the load in second is selected, the stopping time would be, See section on Stopping time. Stopping Time and Deceleration Rate In the formulas used to determine dynamic torque, stopping time or t in seconds is a desired or assumed value selected on the requirements of the application. For optimum brake performance, a stopping or braking time of second or less is desirable. Stop times between and 3 seconds require test. A brake of insufficient torque rating will lengthen the stopping time. This may result in overheating of the brake to a point where torque falls appreciably. The friction material could carbonize, glaze, or fail. After determining the braking torque required by a system, it may be necessary to recalculate the stopping time based on the actual brake size selected to insure that stopping time falls within the 0 to second range. Any formula, where the stopping time is a variable, may be rewritten to solve for the new stopping time. For instance, the dynamic torque equation may be transposed as follows: Brakes are rated in static torque. This value is converted to dynamic torque, as done in the above equation, when stopping time is calculated. That is, The approximate number of revolutions the brake shaft makes when stopping is: The average rate of deceleration when braking a linearly moving load to rest can be calculated using the stopping time determined by the above formula and the initial linear velocity of the load. RPM Considerations The maximum allowable rotational speed of the brake should not be exceeded in braking. Maximum brake rpm as listed in the catalog is intended to limit stopping time to seconds or less and insure friction disc stability. Brakes are not dynamically balanced because of the low brake inertia. Determining Required Thermal Capacity Thermal Ratings When a brake stops a load, it converts mechanical energy to thermal energy or heat. The heat is absorbed by components of the brake. This heat is then dissipated by the brake. The ability of a given brake to absorb and dissipate heat without exceeding temperature limitations is known as thermal capacity. There are two categories of thermal capacity for a brake. The first is the maximum energy the brake can absorb in one stop, generally referred to as a crash or emergency stop. The second is the heat dissipation capability of the brake when it is cycled frequently. To achieve optimum brake performance, the thermal rating should not be exceeded. They are specified for a predetermined maximum temperature rise of the brake friction material. The ability of a brake to absorb and dissipate heat is determined by many factors, including the design of the brake, the ambient temperature, brake enclosure, position of the brake, the surface that the brake is mounted to, and the altitude. 6

127 The rating for a given brake is the maximum allowable. Longer brake life results when the brake has more thermal capacity than a power transmission requires. Much shorter life or brake failure will result when the thermal capacity rating is exceeded. Ratings are determined at an ambient temperature of 7 F ( C), with the brake in a horizontal position, with a stopping time of second or less, and with no external heat source such as a motor. Ambient temperature will limit the thermal capacity of a brake. Temperatures above 7 F ( C) require derating of the thermal capacity rating. For example, at F, thermal capacity is reduced approximately 30% (see Derating Thermal Capacity Chart). CHART: Derating Thermal Capacity motor or gear reducer, will limit the heat dissipation capability or thermal capacity of a brake. These sources of heat should be evaluated when determining the thermal requirements of the system for which the brake is selected. High altitudes may also affect a brake s thermal capacity. Stearns brakes will operate to 0,000 ft above sea level at 7 F ( C) ambient temperature. At 0 F (0 C) ambient temperature, altitude and temperature adjustments occur. Refer to NEMA MG-993 Section for additional information. CHART: Altitude & Thermal Capacity In the case of rotational loads, the energy that the brake must absorb is also kinetic energy. It is determined by the formula: In the case of overhauling loads, both the kinetic energy of the linear and rotating loads and the potential energy transformed into kinetic energy by the change in height or position must be considered when determining the total energy that the brake must absorb. The potential energy transformed to kinetic energy is determined by the formula: A temperature range of 0 F (-7 C) to 0 F (0 C) is acceptable in most brake applications. Above 0 F also consider Class H coil insulation. Thermal capacity ratings are determined with enclosures on the brake. Other customer furnished covers or cowls may affect a brake s thermal capacity. The effect on thermal capacity should be evaluated. In some cases, thermal capacity may be increased by use of air or liquid cooling. However, provisions must be made to prevent contaminating the brake internally. Brakes with brass stationary discs are derated 5%. The mounting position of a brake will also affect thermal capacity. The specified ratings are for brakes mounted in a horizontal position with the solenoid plunger above the solenoid. For brakes mounted in a vertical position, or or more from horizontal, the thermal capacity decreases due to friction disc drag. Brakes are modified for vertical operation to minimize the drag. - and 3- disc brakes are derated 5%, -disc brakes are derated 33%. - and 5-disc brakes are not recommended for vertical use. Maximum Energy Absorption The thermal capacity of a brake is limited by the maximum energy it can absorb in one stop. This factor is important when stopping extremely high inertial loads at infrequent intervals. Such use of a brake requires extensive cooling time before it can be operated again. The energy a brake is required to absorb in one stop by a given power transmission system is determined by the formulas below. The calculated energy of the system should not exceed the maximum kinetic energy rating of the brake. System energy exceeding the brake s maximum rating may result in overheating of the brake to a point where torque falls appreciably. The friction material of the brake could glaze, carbonize or fail. In the case of linear loads, the energy that the brake must absorb is kinetic energy. It is determined by the formula: Thus, the total energy to be absorbed by a brake stoping an overhauling load is: Example 0 illustrates how energy absorption for Example 8 would be determined for one stop. Example 0: Determine the total energy absorbed by a brake in one stop. In Example 8, the calculation for total energy to be absorbed would be as follows. First, calculate the kinetic energy of the linear load. The load weight was,90 lb and the velocity is 9 ft/min or 0.37 ft/sec. The kinetic energy is: Thermal capacity ratings are established without external sources of heat increasing the brake temperature. The surface that a brake is mounted to, such as an electric 7

128 Next, calculate the kinetic energy for the rotational load. The motor inertia is 0.65 lb-ft and the drum inertia reflected to the brake shaft speed is lb-ft. The total rotational inertia at the brakemotor shaft is, Wire the brake through a dedicated relay on overhauling loads where stop time or distance is critical. The potential energy transformed to kinetic energy in this distance would be, may result in overheating of the brake to a point where torque falls appreciably. The friction material of the brake could glaze, carbonize or fail. For rotating or linear loads, the rate at which a brake is required to absorb and dissipate heat when frequently cycled is determined by the relationship: And the kinetic energy of the rotating components is, Thus, the total energy to be absorbed by the brake would be, Now, calculate the potential energy converted to kinetic energy due to the change in position of the load while descending. A descending load is the most severe case since potential energy is transformed to kinetic energy that the brake must absorb. A 5 lb-ft brake was selected in Example 8. The 5 lb-ft static torque rating is converted to dymanic torque, Of this torque, 3.0 lb-ft is required to overcome the overhauling load as determined in Example 8. The dynamic torque available to decelerate the load is, The stopping time resulting from this dynamic torque is, inertia the brake is to retard as determined in Example 8. With the load traveling at 9.0 ft/min or 0.37 ft/sec, the distance it will travel is, The 5 lb-ft brake selected in Example 8 should be capable of absorbing 7 ft-lb of energy. The brake s maximum kinetic energy absorption rating should exceed this value. Motor slip and test loads (% of load) should be considered both in sizing and thermal calculations. Brakes overheated in testing will require inspection before using in the standard application. Heat dissipation in cyclic applications In general, a brake will repetitively stop a load at the duty cycle that a standard electric motor can repetitively start the load. A brake s thermal capacity is based upon the heat it can absorb and dissipate while cycling. The thermal capacity ratings for brakes are listed in the specification tables for specific brake models. The energy that a brake is required to absorb and dissipate by a given power transmission system is determined from the total inertia of the load and system, the rotating or linear speed of the load, and the number of times the load is to be stopped in a given time period. The rate of energy dissipation is expressed in horsepower seconds per minute (hpsec/min). Other common units for energy rates, such as foot pounds per second (ftlb/sec), can be converted to hp-sec/min using the conversion factors given in the Technical Data section. Refer to the Thermal Capacity Chart for use above 0 F (0 C) ambient temperature. For applications demanding optimum brake performance, such as high inertial loads and frequent stops, the rate of energy dissipation required by the system is determined using the following formulas. The calculated rate of energy dissipation should not exceed the thermal capacity of the brake. Thermal dissipation requirements exceeding the brake s rating The rotating speed enters the formula as a squared function. Therefore, thermal requirements are of particular significance in systems where the brake will be operated at high speeds. For overhauling loads, the rate at which a brake is required to absorb and dissipate heat when frequently cycled is determined by the relationship: Example illustrates how the required thermal capacity would be determined for Example. Example : Determine the thermal capacity required to stop a rotating load frequently. Referring back to Example, the flywheel will be stopped 0 times per minute. The required thermal capacity of the 6 lb-ft brake selected in this example is determined as follows. The total inertial load the brake is to retard is 0. lb-ft. The shaft speed of the brake motor is,800 rpm. Therefore, the required thermal capacity is, 8

129 The 6 lb-ft brake selected in Example should have a thermal capacity rating equal to or greater than 3.0 hp-sec/min. A brake with greater thermal capacity will result in greater wear life. If productivity is to be improved in Example by increasing the cycle rate, the maximum number of stops per minute is determined by the rated thermal capacity of the brake. If the 6 lb-ft brake selected in Example has rated thermal capacity of 9 hp-sec/min, the maximum permissible stops per minute would be determined by transposing the above formula to, So, the brake could be operated up to 36 times per minute without exceeding its ability to absorb and dissipate the heat generated by the frequent stops and meet the maximum solenoid cycle rating. Cycle rate cannot exceed the solenoid cycle rate appearing in the catalog. Electrical Considerations Please see page 8. Environmental Considerations Brakes with standard open enclosures when mounted on NEMA C-face motors are drip-proof, except where a manual release lever has a clearance opening in the housing. The standard enclosure is commonly used on open, drip-proof and enclosed motors operating indoors or in protected outdoor environments. NEMA, IP 5 enclosures are available on most brake models and are commonly used for outdoor installations, or where there are moist, abrasive or dusty environments. Standard and severe duty NEMA enclosures are available in some brake series. Brakes of various styles and materials for above or below deck on ships and dockside installation are available. The materials are usually specified by the ship designers or Navy specification MIL-B-639C. Brakes are also available to meet MIL-E-7807B for shipboard weapon and cargo elevators. Refer to Marine, Maritime and Navy Catalog pages. Brakes Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and certified by Canadian Standards Association are available for use in hazardous locations, including Class I, Groups C and D; and Class II, Groups E, F and G. Motormounted, hazardous-location electric disc brakes are listed only when mounted to a Listed hazardous-location motor of the same Class and Group at the motor manufacturer s facility, and where the combination has been accepted by UL or CSA. This procedure completes the hazardous duty assembly of the brake. However, foot-mounted hazardous-location disc brakes that are Listed are also available for coupling to a motor, and may be installed by anyone. Hazardous-location brakes are not gasketed unless indicated in the brake description. The enclosure prevents flame propagation to the outside atmosphere through controlled clearances. Protection from weather and washdowns must be provided. If the brake is used in a high humidity or low temperature environment, internal electric heaters should be used. Standard ambient temperature range for brake operation is from 0 F (-7 C) to 0 F (0 C). Refer to Thermal Ratings section for brake operation at higher ambient temperatures. Heaters may be available for brake operation at low ambient temperatures and high humidity environments. Ductile iron construction and heaters are recommended for prolonged cold climate use. Conclusion The spring-set, electrically released disc brake is an important accessory to electric motors used in cycling and holding operations. It is available in a wide variety of enclosures. In most applications, a brake requires no additional wiring, controls or auxiliary electrical equipment. It is simple to maintain since the replaceable items, the friction discs, can be easily changed. Many spring-set motor brakes are equipped with features such as simple wear adjustment to provide optimum friction disc life, visual wear indicator, torque adjustment and manual release. Featured on some types of brakes is automatic adjustment to compensate for friction disc wear. This feature eliminates the need for periodic adjustment and is advantageous in remote or inaccessible locations. Not all of the brakes on the market provide all of these features, but there are many Stearns motor brakes offering these features. Care should be exercised in properly selecting a brake giving due consideration to torque as well as environment and thermal requirements. On applications where all the pertinent information is not available, selection must be based on previous experience of the designer and user, as well as the brake manufacturer, and should be confirmed by tests under actual operating conditions. If the brake is selected with reasonable allowances made for extremes in operating conditions, it will perform its task with little attention or maintenance. 9

56700 Series. Available Enclosures: Series. Available Enclosures: IP 23, 56 & Series Series

56700 Series. Available Enclosures: Series. Available Enclosures: IP 23, 56 & Series Series 56 Mounting Face: NEMA 56C, TC and 5TC The 56,X00 have the following design features: Spring-Set Electrically Released Static Torque.5 through 5 lb-ft Adjustable Torque, down to 50% of rated nameplate

More information

Introduction to Armature Actuated Brakes (AAB) Operating Principle. Engaged Condition (power off) Disengaged Condition (power on)

Introduction to Armature Actuated Brakes (AAB) Operating Principle. Engaged Condition (power off) Disengaged Condition (power on) Introduction to Armature Actuated Brakes (AAB) The Armature Actuated Brakes are spring-set, electrically released, friction devices, which develop holding and braking torque in the absence of electrical

More information

Brakes, Clutches & SINPAC SolidState Switches

Brakes, Clutches & SINPAC SolidState Switches Product Line Overview Effective Date: 9/13/2018 Brakes, Clutches & SINPAC SolidState Switches About Us Stearns Brakes Set the Standard for Excellence Our Value To You Stearns is the market leader in providing

More information

Table of Contents. Introduction 1 Brake Selection 2

Table of Contents. Introduction 1 Brake Selection 2 Table of Contents Introduction 1 Brake Selection 2 Brake Basic Motor Frame Size () Enclosure Style Construction Series Pg Small AC & DC motors 3/8, 3/4 NEMA 2 End Mount Steel 40 40000-012 3 48C 1.5-6 NEMA

More information

Stearns Super-Mod Totally-Enclosed Non-Ventilated (TENV) Modules Featuring

Stearns Super-Mod Totally-Enclosed Non-Ventilated (TENV) Modules Featuring TENV/IP54 Super-Mod Clutch-Brake Modules Imagine a totally-enclosed, nonventilated clutch-brake ready to work right out of the box, requiring no modifications. And at a price competitive with open enclosure

More information

Installation and Service Instructions for 87,000 & 87,100 Series Self-Adjust Brakes (rev. B)

Installation and Service Instructions for 87,000 & 87,100 Series Self-Adjust Brakes (rev. B) Spring-Set Disc Brakes P/N 8-078-98-0 effective 03/6/4 Installation and Service Instructions for 87,000 & 87,00 Series Self-Adjust Brakes (rev. B) Tools required for installation and servicing: 3/8 hex

More information

Series 87,700 ( XX) Mounting Face: NEMA 182TC 184TC, 213TC, 215TC, 254TC, 254UC, 256TC and 256UC Double C-Face Coupler 8.5 AK, 7.

Series 87,700 ( XX) Mounting Face: NEMA 182TC 184TC, 213TC, 215TC, 254TC, 254UC, 256TC and 256UC Double C-Face Coupler 8.5 AK, 7. 87,700 (-087-7XX) Mounting Face: NEMA 8TC 8TC, TC, 5TC, 5TC, 5UC, 5TC and 5UC Double C-Face Coupler 8.5 AK, 7.5 AJ Static Torque: through 05 lb-ft Enclosure Material: Aluminum Housing, Cast Iron Endplate

More information

Installation and Service Instructions for 87,000 Series Manual Adjust Brakes (rev. B)

Installation and Service Instructions for 87,000 Series Manual Adjust Brakes (rev. B) Spring-Set Disc Brakes P/N 8-078-98-06 effective /7/ Installation and Service Instructions for 87,000 Series Manual Adjust Brakes (rev. B) Tools required for installation and servicing: 3/8 hex wrench

More information

NEW BRAKE DESIGN For C-FACE Motors from NEMA Frame Motors

NEW BRAKE DESIGN For C-FACE Motors from NEMA Frame Motors NEW BRAKE DESIGN For C-FACE Motors from NEMA Frame Motors 70 SERIES DOUBLE C FACE BRAKE The Next Generation in Direct-Acting Brakes DIRECT REPLACEMENT for Stearns 87,700 Series Brakes DINGS TRADITIONAL

More information

Installation and Service Instructions for 87,000 & 87,100 Series Self-Adjust Brakes (rev. B)

Installation and Service Instructions for 87,000 & 87,100 Series Self-Adjust Brakes (rev. B) Spring-Set Disc Brakes P/N 8-078-98-0 effective 6/6/0 Installation and Service Instructions for 87,000 & 87,00 Series Self-Adjust Brakes (rev. B) Tools required for installation and servicing: 3/8 hex

More information

Preassembled Clutch/Brake Module

Preassembled Clutch/Brake Module Preassembled Clutch/Brake Module P-273-1-WE 819-0343 Installation Instructions An Altra Industrial Motion Company Contents MountingtoaMotor...3 Mounting to a Reducer.............3 Installing the Base Mount...........4

More information

Stearns Heavy Duty Clutches & Brakes... Rugged, Reliable

Stearns Heavy Duty Clutches & Brakes... Rugged, Reliable Stearns Heavy Duty Clutches & Brakes... Rugged, Reliable Stearns heavy duty clutches and brakes represent over 75 years of design, engineering and on-the-job experience. Stearns products are backed by

More information

60 Series End-Mount Brake Instructions Standard Housing

60 Series End-Mount Brake Instructions Standard Housing Bulletin No. BK4655 (04/18) 60 Series End-Mount Brake Instructions Standard Housing Read carefully before attempting to assemble, install, operate or maintain the product described. Protect yourself and

More information

Primary Brake Spline Drive Armature PB-825, PB-1000, PB-1225, PB-1525

Primary Brake Spline Drive Armature PB-825, PB-1000, PB-1225, PB-1525 Primary Brake Spline Drive Armature PB-825, PB-1000, PB-1225, PB-1525 P-209-WE 819-0517 Installation Instructions Contents Installation Instructions PB-825 PB-1000 PB-1225 PB-1525... 3 Coil Data... 5 Burnishing

More information

Gen 2 Clutch/Brake UniModule UM-50, UM-100, UM-180

Gen 2 Clutch/Brake UniModule UM-50, UM-100, UM-180 Gen 2 Clutch/Brake UniModule UM-50, UM-100, UM-180 P-273-4 819-0528 Installation Instructions Vented Enclosed Version Optional An Altra Industrial Motion Company Contents Mounting to a C-Face Motor........3

More information

Warner Electric UNIBRAKE Motor Brakes

Warner Electric UNIBRAKE Motor Brakes P-1699-WE Warner Electric UNIBRAKE Motor Brakes Installation & Operating Instructions Double C Contents General Information........................ 2 Brake Heads............................. 2 Installation...............................

More information

Preassembled Clutch/Electrically Released Brake Module

Preassembled Clutch/Electrically Released Brake Module P-273-2 819-0346 Preassembled Clutch/Electrically Released Brake Module Installation Instructions Contents For These UM Combinations Use These Installation Steps: Introduction...........................

More information

Gen 2 Clutch/Brake UniModule UM-50, UM-100, UM-180

Gen 2 Clutch/Brake UniModule UM-50, UM-100, UM-180 Gen 2 Clutch/Brake UniModule UM-50, UM-100, UM-180 P-273-4-WE 819-0528 Service & Installation Instructions Vented Enclosed Version Optional An Altra Industrial Motion Company Contents Mounting to a C-Face

More information

Installation and Service Instructions for Self Adjust Brakes 82,000 Series

Installation and Service Instructions for Self Adjust Brakes 82,000 Series Spring-Set Disc Brakes P/N 8-078-9-00 effective 0// Installation and Service Instructions for Self Adjust Brakes 8,000 Series Current revision available @ www.rexnord.com/stearns Figure Tools required

More information

Installation and Service Instructions for Self Adjust Brakes 81,000 Series

Installation and Service Instructions for Self Adjust Brakes 81,000 Series Spring-Set Disc Brakes P/N -07-9-00 effective 07/0/0 Installation and Service Instructions for Self Adjust Brakes,000 Series Current revision available @ www.stearns.rexnord.com Tools required for installation

More information

ERD Electrically Released Brakes

ERD Electrically Released Brakes ERD Electrically Released Brakes P-229 819-0453 Installation Instructions Warner Electric s ERD series spring set, electrically released brakes are designed to hold a load when the power to the brake is

More information

AC Rectifiers for use with Armature Actuated Brakes. Product Overview. Full Wave. Half Wave. Combination Full and Half Wave. TOR-AC Full and Half Wave

AC Rectifiers for use with Armature Actuated Brakes. Product Overview. Full Wave. Half Wave. Combination Full and Half Wave. TOR-AC Full and Half Wave Rectifiers for use with Armature Actuated Brakes Product Overview NOTE: For brake response times with and without rectifiers see page 94. Full Wave A rectifier in which both positive and negative half-cycles

More information

Preassembled Clutch/Electrically Released Brake Module

Preassembled Clutch/Electrically Released Brake Module Preassembled Clutch/Electrically Released Brake Module P-273-2-WE 819-0346 Installation Instructions An Altra Industrial Motion Company Contents Introduction... 2 Mounting to a Motor... 3 Mounting to a

More information

TB Series Brakes Tension Control System

TB Series Brakes Tension Control System TB Series Brakes Tension Control System P-235-WE Service & Installation Instructions An Altra Industrial Motion Company Contents Installation Instructions...3 Coil Data...4 Maintenance...5 Control Connections...5

More information

Design features of models K and AC brakes. K DC-Powered Brake. AC Three phase Powered Brake

Design features of models K and AC brakes. K DC-Powered Brake. AC Three phase Powered Brake NEMA C-Face spring applied fail-safe brakes model K and AC mounted brakes with NEMA 2 housing are designed specifically to interchange with Stearns and Dings models as shown in Table1. Design features

More information

Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions Primary Brake Pin Drive Armature PB-825, PB-1000, PB-1225, PB-1525 Motor Brake and Spline Drive MB-825, MB-1000, MB-1225 Pin Drive P-208 819-036 Installation Instructions Contents Installation Instructions

More information

Thermal. Dimensions Torque Rotating. Rotating Capacity lb.ft. HPS/Min. Lb-Ft

Thermal. Dimensions Torque Rotating. Rotating Capacity lb.ft. HPS/Min. Lb-Ft Bulletin No. BK4755 (11/07) 1-70 Series End-Mount Brake Instructions NEMA 2 Enclosure Read carefully before attempting to assemble, install, operate or maintain the product described. Protect yourself

More information

Electrically Released Motor Brake Module for EM-MBFB and EUM-MBFB Size 50, 100, 180

Electrically Released Motor Brake Module for EM-MBFB and EUM-MBFB Size 50, 100, 180 Electrically Released Motor Brake Module for EM-MBFB and EUM-MBFB Size 50, 100, 180 P-273-8-WE 819-0531 Installation Instructions Vented Enclosed Version Optional Warner Electric s MBFB series of Electrically

More information

Advanced Technology Tension Clutches

Advanced Technology Tension Clutches P-220 819-0339 Advanced Technology Tension Clutches Installation Instructions Contents Installation................................. 2 Clutch Repair On the Shaft.................. 4 Clutch Service Major.......................

More information

Gen 2 Electrically Released Motor Brake Module for EM-MBFB and EUM-MBFB

Gen 2 Electrically Released Motor Brake Module for EM-MBFB and EUM-MBFB Gen 2 Electrically Released Motor Brake Module for EM-MBFB and EUM-MBFB P-273-8 819-0531 Installation Instructions Vented Enclosed Version Optional An Altra Industrial Motion Company Warner Electric s

More information

REDI-LINE. Rugged, Reliable, DC to AC Power Conversion ELECTRIC GENERATORS USER'S GUIDE. KARAM A.L.

REDI-LINE. Rugged, Reliable, DC to AC Power Conversion ELECTRIC GENERATORS USER'S GUIDE. KARAM A.L. REDI-LINE ELECTRIC GENERATORS USER'S GUIDE Rugged, Reliable, DC to AC Power Conversion KARAM A.L. www.alternatorstarter.com 1-888-515-2726 REDI-LINE ELECTRIC GENERATOR MODEL INPUT ACTUAL OUTPUT ACTUAL

More information

Electro-Brake 375, 475, 650, 825, 1000, 1225

Electro-Brake 375, 475, 650, 825, 1000, 1225 Electro-Brake 375, 475, 650, 825, 1000, 1225 P-211-WE 819-0043 Installation Instructions An Altra Industrial Motion Company Contents Installation Instructions.... 2 Electrical Coil Data.... 5 Burnishing

More information

Electrically Released Motor Brake Module for EM-MBFB and EUM-MBFB

Electrically Released Motor Brake Module for EM-MBFB and EUM-MBFB Electrically Released Motor Brake Module for EM-MBFB and EUM-MBFB P-1337-WE 819-0314 Installation Instructions An Altra Industrial Motion Company Warner Electric s MBFB series of Electrically Released

More information

Installation, Service and Parts List Series 56,800 for Class I & II, Division 2 Manual Adjust Brakes

Installation, Service and Parts List Series 56,800 for Class I & II, Division 2 Manual Adjust Brakes Spring-Set Disc Brakes P/N 8-078-905-8 effective /0/0 Installation, Service and Parts List Series 56,800 for Class I & II, Division Manual Adjust Brakes Tools required for installation and servicing: /8

More information

180VC WITH B5 FLANGE / M ,6 0, / M l 5,0 0,7 192 / M ,0 0,9 223

180VC WITH B5 FLANGE / M ,6 0, / M l 5,0 0,7 192 / M ,0 0,9 223 METRIC (IEC) FRAME THYRISTOR RATED DC METRIC (IEC) FRAME MOTORS IP54 These metric dimensioned motors are built to IEC 34-1 electrical and mechanical standards. The IEC 63 and smaller frames are stocked

More information

Electromagnetic Particle Brakes Model: PRB-H

Electromagnetic Particle Brakes Model: PRB-H P-223-3 819-0370 Electromagnetic Particle Brakes Model: PRB-H Installation Instructions Table of Contents Introduction............................2 Installation Instructions....................3 Start

More information

AC Motor Brakes. General Information. Features. Add-On Brakes. Spring Applied Power-Off Operation. Motor Brake Coil Current. Mounting.

AC Motor Brakes. General Information. Features. Add-On Brakes. Spring Applied Power-Off Operation. Motor Brake Coil Current. Mounting. Spring Applied Power-Off Operation Power-Off Operation Inertia Dynamics AC-style, spring applied motor brakes are designed to decelerate or park inertial loads when the voltage is turned off, either intentionally

More information

SERIES 740 VALVES PNEUMATIC DIRECTIONAL CONTROL

SERIES 740 VALVES PNEUMATIC DIRECTIONAL CONTROL SERIES 740 VALVES PNEUMATIC DIRECTIONAL CONTROL Specifications and features 4 Way / 2 & 3 Position Solenoid & Air Pilot Operated Diaphragm-Poppet Valve TECHNICAL DATA: Port Sizes: Integrated Fittings for

More information

Inertia of Rotating Parts Lb-Ft 2. Thermal Capacity HPS/Min.*

Inertia of Rotating Parts Lb-Ft 2. Thermal Capacity HPS/Min.* 60 Series Double C Brake Instructions NEMA 4X Washdown Housing Read carefully before attempting to assemble, install, operate or maintain the product described. Protect yourself and others by observing

More information

Service & Installation Instructions. An Altra Industrial Motion Company P WE Vented. Enclosed Version Optional

Service & Installation Instructions. An Altra Industrial Motion Company P WE Vented. Enclosed Version Optional Gen 2 Electro-Module EM-50, EM-100, EM-180 Electrically Released Permanent Magnet Brake Module EM-50-20FBB, EM-100-20FBB, EM-180-20FBB EM-50-20FBC, EM-100-20FBC, EM-180-20FBC P-273-5-WE 819-0529 Service

More information

Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions Gen 2 Electro-Module EM-50, EM-100, EM-180 Electrically Released Permanent Magnet Brake Module EM-50-20FBB, EM-100-20FBB, EM-180-20FBB EM-50-20FBC, EM-100-20FBC, EM-180-20FBC P-273-5 819-0529 Installation

More information

SFP-250 and SFP-400. Installation Instructions. An Altra Industrial Motion Company P-231-WE

SFP-250 and SFP-400. Installation Instructions. An Altra Industrial Motion Company P-231-WE SFP-250 and SFP-400 P-231-WE 819-0382 Installation Instructions An Altra Industrial Motion Company Contents Introduction... 2 Installation... 3 Maintenance.... 3 Troubleshooting... 4 Specifications....

More information

MTB II Modular Tension Brakes

MTB II Modular Tension Brakes P-259-1 819-0342 MTB II Modular Tension Brakes Installation Instructions An Altra Industrial Motion Company Introduction The instructions on this sheet cover installation of all replacement components

More information

12-1/4 x 3-1/2 Electric Wheel Brake

12-1/4 x 3-1/2 Electric Wheel Brake 12-1/4 x 3-1/2 Electric Wheel Brake A-216 819-0244 Installation Instructions An Altra Industrial Motion Company Contents Dimensions.... 2 Technical Specifications.... 3 Installation Instructions General....

More information

DUSTTRAK AEROSOL MONITOR SOLAR POWER KIT MODEL

DUSTTRAK AEROSOL MONITOR SOLAR POWER KIT MODEL DUSTTRAK AEROSOL MONITOR SOLAR POWER KIT MODEL 854060 (USED FOR POWERING ENVIRONMENTAL ENCLOSURE MODELS MODELS 854030, 8535 AND 8537) OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL P/N 6008416, REVISION C JUNE 2017

More information

DC MOTORS NEMA FRAME SCR RATED

DC MOTORS NEMA FRAME SCR RATED NEMA FRAME SCR RATED NEMA FRAME MOTORS SCR RATED High voltage permanent magnet DC motors are typically used with an SCR (thyristor) controller in applications requiring adjustable speed and constant torque

More information

HR-20P Pneumatically Controlled Pressure Regulator

HR-20P Pneumatically Controlled Pressure Regulator HR-20P Pneumatically Controlled Pressure Regulator Instruction and Service Manual Hydroplex Corporation 230 West Gloria Switch Rd. Lafayette, LA 70507 337-233-0626 www.hydroplexpumps.com I. General Instructions

More information

USER MANUAL. NEMA 48C Flange Mounted, Enclosed, Clutch Brake. FMCBE Model 500 FORM NO. L A (i)

USER MANUAL. NEMA 48C Flange Mounted, Enclosed, Clutch Brake. FMCBE Model 500 FORM NO. L A (i) USER MANUAL NEMA 48C Flange Mounted, Enclosed, Clutch Brake FMCBE Model 500 (i) In accordance with Nexen s established policy of constant product improvement, the specifications contained in this manual

More information

80 Series 4 Post Brake Instructions

80 Series 4 Post Brake Instructions Bulletin No. BK4604 (12/01) 80 Series 4 Post Brake Instructions Read carefully before attempting to assemble, install, operate or maintain the product described. Protect yourself and others by observing

More information

CBC-160-1N and CBC-160-2N Clutch/Brake Controls

CBC-160-1N and CBC-160-2N Clutch/Brake Controls P-239-36 819-04 CBC-160-1N and Clutch/Brake Controls Installation Instructions An Altra Industrial Motion Company Contents Introduction...2 Specifications........................... 2 Installation...3

More information

DIRACT BRAKES 70 SERIES 4 POST BRAKE INSTRUCTIONS

DIRACT BRAKES 70 SERIES 4 POST BRAKE INSTRUCTIONS Bulletin No. BK4605 (3/18) DIRACT BRAKES 70 SERIES 4 POST BRAKE INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT Read this bulletin carefully before installing or operating this brake. Failure to comply with these instructions

More information

Heavy Duty Industrial Foot Switches

Heavy Duty Industrial Foot Switches P-1303 819-0523 Heavy Duty Industrial Foot Switches Installation Instructions Failure to follow these instructions may result in product damage, equipment damage, and serious or fatal injury to personnel.

More information

INSTRUCTIONS SMOKE BLOWER WITH HONDA ENGINE PART NUMBER

INSTRUCTIONS SMOKE BLOWER WITH HONDA ENGINE PART NUMBER 1 INSTRUCTIONS SMOKE BLOWER WITH HONDA ENGINE PART NUMBER 303-568 CHERNE INDUSTRIES INCORPORATED 1-800-THE PLUG 5700 LINCOLN DRIVE (1-800-843-7584) MINNEAPOLIS, MN 55436-1695 FAX: 1-800-843-7585 www.cherneind.com

More information

SERIES 2100 Resilient Seated Butterfly Valves

SERIES 2100 Resilient Seated Butterfly Valves SERIES 2100 Resilient Seated Butterfly Valves Publication S2100-101 Issue 06/16 Rev. C Design Characteristics Applications Commercial Heating & Air Conditioning Waste Water & Water Treatment Sea Water

More information

G Series Hazardous Brake Instructions DESCRIPTION

G Series Hazardous Brake Instructions DESCRIPTION Bulletin No. BK4606 (8/07) 70 Series Hazardous Brake Instructions READ THIS BULLETIN CAREFULLY BEFORE INSTALLING OR OPERATING THE 70 SERIES BRAKE. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THESE INSTRUCTIONS CANCELS ALL

More information

70 Series 8700 Coupler 2-pc Hub & Shaft Three Phase Brake Instructions IP43 & IP56 (NEMA 2 & 4) Housing

70 Series 8700 Coupler 2-pc Hub & Shaft Three Phase Brake Instructions IP43 & IP56 (NEMA 2 & 4) Housing Bulletin No. BK4775-3 (08/2016) 70 Series 8700 Coupler 2-pc Hub & Shaft Three Phase Brake Instructions IP43 & IP56 (NEMA 2 & 4) Housing Read carefully before attempting to assemble, install, operate or

More information

FCB-450, LCB-600, MCB-800

FCB-450, LCB-600, MCB-800 AIR CHAMP PRODUCTS User Manual FCB-450, LCB-600, MCB-800 Clutch-Brakes (i) In accordance with Nexen s established policy of constant product improvement, the specifications contained in this manual are

More information

ANGLgear. right angle drives Inch and Metric Series. The Original Right Angle Gear Drive Made in the U.S.A.

ANGLgear. right angle drives Inch and Metric Series. The Original Right Angle Gear Drive Made in the U.S.A. ANGLgear right angle drives Inch and Metric Series The Original Right Angle Gear Drive Made in the U.S.A. INDEX Intro to ANGLgear Inch & Metric Series pg. 2-3 2 Flange Units, Inch Series pg. 4 3 Flange

More information

AT Clutch Major Service Sizes 25, 55, 115

AT Clutch Major Service Sizes 25, 55, 115 P-1404 819-0324 AT Clutch Major Service Sizes 25, 55, 115 Installation Instructions Contents Introduction............................ 2 Warranty....................... back cover Failure to follow these

More information

GRINNELL Model B302 and Model BN302 Grooved End Butterfly Valves with Gear Operators or Lever-Lock Operators General Description

GRINNELL Model B302 and Model BN302 Grooved End Butterfly Valves with Gear Operators or Lever-Lock Operators General Description Technical Services -00- +-0--0 www.grinnell.com GRINNELL Model B0 and Model BN0 Grooved End Butterfly Valves with Gear Operators or Lever-Lock Operators General Description The GRINNELL Models B0 and BN0

More information

Operation Key D4BS - K Head Mounting Direction F: Four mounting directions possible (front-side mounting at shipping)

Operation Key D4BS - K Head Mounting Direction F: Four mounting directions possible (front-side mounting at shipping) Safety-door Switch D4BS The Special Activates a Direct Opening Mechanism to Open the Contacts and Shut Off Control Circuits when Protective Doors Are Opened on Machine Tools or Other Equipment CSM_D4BS_DS_E_6_1

More information

Installation Guide. Marine Filter SURT023M SURT024M

Installation Guide. Marine Filter SURT023M SURT024M Installation Guide Marine SURT023M SURT024M suo0738a Product Description The APC by Schneider Electric Marine Application reduces the EMI (electro magnetic interference), produced by a connected that

More information

The Best Value in Washdown Duty Motors and Drives

The Best Value in Washdown Duty Motors and Drives The Best Value in Washdown Duty Motors and Drives Long before we invested in the people, equipment and material required to produce Baldor Reliance Washdown Duty motors and drives, we invested our time

More information

Compressor Clutch Replacement Procedure

Compressor Clutch Replacement Procedure P-1411 819-0361 Compressor Clutch Replacement Procedure Installation Instructions World Clutch with Unidamp Armature for Ford FX-15 and FS-10 Compressors and all Denso Models with 30mm bearing fit. Keep

More information

SERIES 1000 ELECTRIC ACTUATORS

SERIES 1000 ELECTRIC ACTUATORS SERIES 1000 ELECTRIC ACTUATORS DESIGN FEATURES Series 1000 On-Off Rotary Electric Actuator Standard Features SERIES 1000 ELECTRIC ACTUATORS Torque Output Range: 434in-lb to 17,700in-lb Housing: NEMA 4,

More information

Blue Max 2000 Vector Duty 2000:1 Constant Torque Motors

Blue Max 2000 Vector Duty 2000:1 Constant Torque Motors Blue Max 2000 Vector Duty 2000:1 Constant Torque Motors Applications: Blue Max motors are used in variable frequency drive applications requiring full rated torque at zero speed, utilizing Closed- or Open-Loop

More information

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND PARTS LIST BRIDGE DRIVE GEAR CASE

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND PARTS LIST BRIDGE DRIVE GEAR CASE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND PARTS LIST BRIDGE DRIVE GEAR CASE GENERAL Units are intended to be used within 30 days after receipt. If they are to be stored for a longer period of time, contact the factory

More information

Wrap Spring Clutches & Brakes CB & Super CB Series P-2026-WE SM592-gb-02/08

Wrap Spring Clutches & Brakes CB & Super CB Series P-2026-WE SM592-gb-02/08 Wrap Spring Clutches & Brakes CB & Super CB Series P-2026-WE SM592-gb-02/08 Service Manual CONTENTS 1 Assembly instructions CB-2 - CB-5 2-3 1.1 Disassembly 3 1.2 Removal of anti-overrun spring 3 1.3 Assembly

More information

Utility Controller Hand Air Operated

Utility Controller Hand Air Operated Utility Controller Hand Air Operated P-1395 819-0288 Installation Instructions Introduction The Warner Electric air/manual Utility Controller combines manual and automatic (air) actuation for the operation

More information

SERIES 2200 Replaceable Seat Butterfly Valves

SERIES 2200 Replaceable Seat Butterfly Valves SERIES 2200 Replaceable Seat Butterfly Valves Publication S2200-101 Issue 04/18 Rev. A Design Characteristics Multiple Seat Options VSI offers various seat options including EPDM, NBR, Viton, and others

More information

Stellar 4 Clutch Manual

Stellar 4 Clutch Manual INSTRUCTIONS Stellar 4 Clutch Manual Thank you for choosing Tomar products; we are proud to be your manufacturer of choice. Please read this instruction sheet carefully before beginning installation, and

More information

SFC-825, SFC-1000, SFC-1225, SFC-1525 Heavy Duty Clutch Coupling and SFC-1525 High Torque Heavy Duty Clutch Coupling

SFC-825, SFC-1000, SFC-1225, SFC-1525 Heavy Duty Clutch Coupling and SFC-1525 High Torque Heavy Duty Clutch Coupling SFC-825, SFC-1000, SFC-1225, SFC-1525 Heavy Duty Clutch Coupling and SFC-1525 High Torque Heavy Duty Clutch Coupling Installation Instructions P-207 819-0516 Contents Installation Instructions.......................3

More information

Installation & Operation Manual. Electrak 10 Series / Electromechanical Linear Actuator

Installation & Operation Manual. Electrak 10 Series / Electromechanical Linear Actuator www..com Installation & Operation Manual Electrak 10 Series / Electromechanical Linear Actuator INTRODUCTION Thomson has many years of experience designing and manufacturing linear actuators for a wide

More information

FADE SERIES. Typical Specifications for Model FADE Sidewall Propeller Fans Sidewall propeller fans shall be of the direct driven type.

FADE SERIES. Typical Specifications for Model FADE Sidewall Propeller Fans Sidewall propeller fans shall be of the direct driven type. January 2008 FADE0108 Fantech, Inc. certifies that the FADE Series shown herein is licensed to bear the AMCA Seal. The ratings shown are based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA

More information

CD Couplings SERIES A1C. MTY (81) MEX (55) QRO (442) DIST.

CD Couplings SERIES A1C. MTY (81) MEX (55) QRO (442) DIST. CD Couplings SERIES A1C ZERO-MAX CD COUPLINGS SERIES A1C For today s most demanding servo motor and motion control applications. CD Couplings Series A1C are precise, robust, and available in sizes and

More information

Primary Brakes PB-120, PB-170, PB-250, PB-400

Primary Brakes PB-120, PB-170, PB-250, PB-400 Primary Brakes PB-120, PB-170, PB-250, PB-400 P-201-WE 819-0480 Installation Instructions An Altra Industrial Motion Company Contents Installation Instructions PB-120 PB-170 PB-250 PB-400... 2-9 Electrical

More information

MULTIPOSITION AIR CYLINDER

MULTIPOSITION AIR CYLINDER MULTIPOSITION AIR CYLINDER CAST ALUMINUM FOUR-POSITION - ALL AIR SERVICE INFORMATION MOUNTING! Devices should be mounted and positioned in such a manner that they cannot be accidentally operated. INSTALLATION

More information

AIR CHAMP PRODUCTS. User Manual. Sheave & Pilot Mount Clutch-Brake Model BCB-275 FORM NO. L F-0414 FORM NO. L F-0414

AIR CHAMP PRODUCTS. User Manual. Sheave & Pilot Mount Clutch-Brake Model BCB-275 FORM NO. L F-0414 FORM NO. L F-0414 AIR CHAMP PRODUCTS User Manual Sheave & Pilot Mount Clutch-Brake Model BCB-275 i In accordance with Nexen s established policy of constant product improvement, the specifications contained in this manual

More information

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FORM #PM-126 REV A 12/09

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FORM #PM-126 REV A 12/09 HAND CRANK & MOTORIZED POWER CORD REELS: SERIES 1125PC SERIES: 1125PC HAND CRANK SERIES: 1125PC MOTORIZED COXREELS The technical data and images which appear in this manual are for informational purposes

More information

FS Series INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL: FS SERIES SHEAR BLENDER. Sanitary Mixing and Blending Equipment

FS Series INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL: FS SERIES SHEAR BLENDER. Sanitary Mixing and Blending Equipment FS Series INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL: FS SERIES SHEAR BLENDER Sanitary Mixing and Blending Equipment 2 Fristam Pumps DESCRIPTION This manual contains installation, operation, assembly, disassembly

More information

Electro-Packs EP-170, 250, 400, 500, 825, 1000, 1525

Electro-Packs EP-170, 250, 400, 500, 825, 1000, 1525 Electro-Packs EP-170, 250, 400, 500, 825, 1000, 1525 P-212 819-0078 Installation Instructions An Altra Industrial Motion ompany ontents Features............................. 2 Selection.............................

More information

Pneumatic Single Disc and Dual Disc Brakes P250 and P620

Pneumatic Single Disc and Dual Disc Brakes P250 and P620 P-208-WE SM318-gb-02/09 Pneumatic Single Disc and Dual Disc Brakes P20 and P20 Service Manual We, WARNER ELECTRIC EUROPE,, rue Champfleur, B.P. 2009, F-49182 St Barthélemy d Anjou Cedex declare that the

More information

12 Volt Utility Controller for 4, 6, or 8 Brakes No

12 Volt Utility Controller for 4, 6, or 8 Brakes No 12 Volt Utility Controller for 4, 6, or 8 Brakes No. 1300-76 P-1396-WE 819-0301 Installation Instructions An Altra Industrial Motion Company Contents Introduction... 2 Installation... 3 Mounting Under

More information

GRADE 3 TUBULAR LOCKSETS INDEX:

GRADE 3 TUBULAR LOCKSETS INDEX: GRADE 3 TUBULAR LOCKSETS INDEX: Applications...Ad:1 Standard Features...Ad:1 Functions...Ad:1 How to Order - Nomenclature...Ad:2 Grade 3 D360 Series Residential Deadbolt Applications...Ad:3 Standard Features...Ad:3

More information

6.0 SPECIFICATIONS CONTENTS. Calibration. According to factory procedureeeeeeeeeeeeeee Accuracy*

6.0 SPECIFICATIONS CONTENTS. Calibration. According to factory procedureeeeeeeeeeeeeee Accuracy* 6.0 SPECIFICATIONS Calibration According to factory procedureeeeeeeeeeeeeee Accuracy* ± 1% full scale (FS) or ± 1 graduation on scale Scale diameter 41 mm Temperature range 45 to 115 F (10-45 C) Air humidity

More information

Engineering Information. Solenoid Valves Principles of Operation. Solenoid Valves. Direct Acting Valves (Figures 1A, 1B)

Engineering Information. Solenoid Valves Principles of Operation. Solenoid Valves. Direct Acting Valves (Figures 1A, 1B) 4 Engineering Information Principles of Operation A solenoid valve is a combination of two basic functional units: A solenoid (electromagnet) with its core A valve body containing one or more orifices

More information

Flo-Way. Measure Granular or Powdered Material. Stand Alone or Connect to Other Devices for Blending. Used by Successful Producers World-Wide

Flo-Way. Measure Granular or Powdered Material. Stand Alone or Connect to Other Devices for Blending. Used by Successful Producers World-Wide Flo-Way R Solids Impact Flow Meter Measure Granular or Powdered Material Stand Alone or Connect to Other Devices for Blending Used by Successful Producers World-Wide Visit our website: www.beltwayscales.com

More information

INDUSTRIES AMERICAN COOLAIR CORPORATION. Centrifugal Filtered Supply Roof Ventilators TYPE CFS - TYPE SIS

INDUSTRIES AMERICAN COOLAIR CORPORATION. Centrifugal Filtered Supply Roof Ventilators TYPE CFS - TYPE SIS INDUSTRIES AMERICAN COOLAIR CORPORATION Centrifugal Filtered Supply Roof Ventilators TYPE CFS - TYPE SIS CFS Centrifugal Filtered Supply Fans Applications The CFS Centrifugal Filtered supply fans with

More information

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FORM #PM-122 REV A 12/09

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FORM #PM-122 REV A 12/09 HAND CRANK WELDING CABLE REEL: SERIES 100WC COXREELS The technical data and images which appear in this manual are for informational purposes only. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES

More information

HIGH VOLTAGE DIGITAL AMMETER

HIGH VOLTAGE DIGITAL AMMETER HIGH VOLTAGE DIGITAL AMMETER Operating & Instruction Manual HVA-2000 Making the Invisible Visible TM 1475 Lakeside Drive Waukegan, Illinois 60085 U.S.A. 847.473.4980 f a x 8 4 7. 4 7 3. 4 9 8 1 w e b s

More information

Section 5 MagnaShear (Fully Electric) Motor Brakes

Section 5 MagnaShear (Fully Electric) Motor Brakes APC-200 All Products Catalog Section MagnaShear (Fully Electric) Motor Brakes Force Control Industries, Inc. Main Office and Manufacturing Plant 30 Dixie Highway Fairfield, Ohio 4014 Telephone: (13) 88-0900

More information

SCHMIDT COUPLINGS OPERATIONAL BENEFITS

SCHMIDT COUPLINGS OPERATIONAL BENEFITS SCHMIDT COUPLINS OPERATIONAL BENEFITS Example 1 Before After Radial Forces Space Savings. Diagram shows how this can be achieved with double universal joints but causes radial forces at the joints and

More information

12 Volt Utility Controller for 4, 6 or 8 Brakes No P

12 Volt Utility Controller for 4, 6 or 8 Brakes No P 12 Volt Utility Controller for 4, 6 or 8 Brakes No. 1300-77 P-1379 819-0094 Installation Instructions Introduction The Warner Electric manually operated Utility Controller operates 4, 6, or 8 twelve-volt

More information

70 Series 8700 End Mount Three Phase Brake Instructions IP56 (NEMA 4) Housing

70 Series 8700 End Mount Three Phase Brake Instructions IP56 (NEMA 4) Housing Bulletin No. BK4773-3 (08/2016) 70 Series 8700 End Mount Three Phase Brake Instructions IP56 (NEMA 4) Housing Read carefully before attempting to assemble, install, operate or maintain the product described.

More information

G3PE-Single-phase. Solid State Relays for Heaters

G3PE-Single-phase. Solid State Relays for Heaters Solid State Relays for Heaters Single-phase CSM_Single-phase_DS_E Compact, Slim-profile SSRs with Heat Sinks. s with No Zero Cross for a Wide Range of Applications. RoHS compliant. s also available with

More information

PB-500 Pin Drive, PB-500 Spline Drive PB-650 Pin Drive

PB-500 Pin Drive, PB-500 Spline Drive PB-650 Pin Drive PB-500 Pin Drive, PB-500 Spline Drive PB-650 Pin Drive P-204 819-0485 Installation Instructions Contents Installation Instructions PB-500 Pin Drive.......................3 PB-500 Spline Drive....................6

More information

McCANNA Actuation Systems B

McCANNA Actuation Systems B 17710-B Ramcon Series 8/25 C/CR, 50/100 B/BR, 250/500 B/BR Electric Actuators Installation, Operation and Maintenance Instructions Contents Storage...........................................................................................................

More information

70 Series 8700 End Mount Three Phase Brake Instructions IP43 (NEMA 2) Housing

70 Series 8700 End Mount Three Phase Brake Instructions IP43 (NEMA 2) Housing Bulletin No. BK4772S-3 (6/2017) 70 Series 8700 End Mount Three Phase Brake Instructions IP43 (NEMA 2) Housing Read carefully before attempting to assemble, install, operate or maintain the product described.

More information

Electrically Released Brakes

Electrically Released Brakes ER Series Electrically Released Brakes Specifications Inertia lb.ft. Weight lbs. Total Model Bore Size Voltage DC Static Torque lb. ft. Max. RPM Drive Arm. & Carrier Hub Arm. & Carrier Hub Weight lbs.

More information

INSTALLATION & OPERATION MANUAL

INSTALLATION & OPERATION MANUAL INSTALLATION & OPERATION MANUAL VTC125d-6-12 Voltage Converter An ISO9001 and AS9100 Registered Company Battery Chargers Inverters Power Supplies Voltage Converters 8128 River Way, Delta B.C. V4G 1K5 Canada

More information